Midtown, Downtown, and Stamford Courses

2008 Catalog
www.nyif.com
Accounting & Tax • Alternative Investments • CFA
®
/CMT Exam Prep • Core Finance Concepts • Corporate
Finance • Credit Risk • Derivatives • Financial Modeling • Fixed Income • Investment & Portfolio Management •
Mergers & Acquisitions • Operations & Compliance • Professional Skills • Project Finance • Risk
Management • Special Programs • Structured Products • Technical Analysis • Trading • Wealth Management
2008
Courses
Founded by the New York Stock
Exchange in 1922, the New York
Institute of Finance is the world’s
premier provider of instructor-led and
web-based training to the banking,
finance and corporate sectors.
We attract the most experienced
instructors and subject matter experts
for every specialization across the
industry and as part of Pearson,
New York Institute of Finance has
access to the best financial intellectual
capital in the world.
Comments taken from class evaluation forms
Why Choose the New York Institute of Finance?
With knowledgeable expert instructors and first-class course content, the New York Institute of
Finance is the training provider of choice for finance professionals around the world.
Five easy ways to register…
Phone
212-641-6616
Monday through Friday
9:00 am–5:00 pm EST
E-mail
customercare@nyif.com
Web
Full course agendas, secure registration and payment
facilities at your fingertips: www.nyif.com
Fax
212-641-2598
Mail
Please send registration information to:
New York Institute of Finance
1330 Avenue of the Americas
10th Floor
New York, NY 10019
Contents
Special Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Core Skills Analyst Program . . . . . . . 4
Introducing Wall Street . . . . . . . . . . 7
Technical Analysis Workshop. . . . . . 8
Wealth Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Accounting & Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Alternative Investments . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CFA
®
/ CMT Exam Prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Core Finance Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Corporate Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Credit Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Derivatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Financial Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fixed Income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Investment & Portfolio Management . 59
Mergers & Acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Operations & Compliance . . . . . . . . . 69
Professional Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Project Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Risk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Structured Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Technical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Trading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
eLearning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Virtual NYIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Continuing Professional Education . . 116
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Enrollment Application
and Order Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
© New York Institute of Finance 2008. New York Institute of Finance reserves the right to alter the prices,
change the instructors, or cancel the course at any time due to unforeseen circumstances.
Every attendee at a New York Institute of Finance
course receives a COMPLIMENTARY 6-month
subscription to the Financial Times* and FT.com.
*U.S. residents only. Non-U.S. and Canada residents
receive an FT.com subscription only.
Find out more about
our Professional
Certificate Programs
C E R T I F I C A T E O F C O M P L E T I O N
This is to certify that
Jane Lees
has completed all required coursework for
Professional Certificate in Finance
Date: July 2, 2004
Number of CPE Credits: 24
Field of Study: Investment Analysis
Instructional Method: Group-Live, Online
Courses Completed:
Equities I Online Course
Financial Statement Analysis
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry
Introduction to Business Valuation Online
Introducing the City
In accordance with the standards of the National Registry of CPE Sponsors, CPE credits have been granted based on a 50-minute hour.
National Registry of CPE Sponsors
FT Knowledge Financial Learning ID Number 103413
New York Institute of Finance
1330 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10019
www.ftknowledge.com
See page for details.
Location Key
M
New York Institute of Finance Headquarters
1330 Avenue of the Americas, 9th Floor
(Southeast corner of 54th St. & 6th Ave.)
New York, NY 10019
D
New York Institute of Finance Downtown Campus
Securities Training Corporation
17 Battery Place North, 6th floor
(2-26 Washington Street Entrance)
New York, NY 10004
S
New York Institute of Finance Stamford
University of Connecticut - Stamford
CITI
1 University Place
Stamford, CT 06901-2315
Special Programs Special Programs
Core
Skills
Analyst
Program
How is the Program Structured?
The main program is three weeks, beginning April 7 or August 11. There are three core
modules, each one week long:
Credit Risk Analysis •
Corporate Finance & Valuation Fundamentals •
Financial Modeling •
There is also an optional Accounting Bootcamp before the main three-week program.
The Accounting Bootcamp is designed as a foundation to the main course, covering the
basic tools and concepts attendees need to be familiar with to complete the program.
Each module may also be taken individually.
Core Skills Analyst Program q DC
Dates April 7–25
M
, August 11–29
M
Sessions 3 Weeks
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRCN1037
Instructor Various
Cost $9,950
CPE Credits 108.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Bringing together core finance concepts and theories, this program is a challenging and
rewarding experience for entry-level analysts, finance, and investment professionals
seeking to enhance their skill set. Real-life case studies supplement the hands-on
learning experience, providing a wealth of practical knowledge to take back to the
workplace. Participants will be able to:
Train with other finance professionals in an academic environment •
Supplement in-house continuing education training •
Practice skills with hands-on case studies and exercises •
Use newly acquired skills and knowledge to present work to leading practitioners and •
receive feedback
Develop a solid foundation in core skills to reach your potential and open the door to •
new opportunities
Build contacts •
Who Should Attend: The program will benefit anyone who wishes to enhance existing
skills or learn new ones. It should be of particular interest to entry-level finance
professionals, investment professionals, research analysts, corporate bankers, fixed
income analysts, credit analysts, mergers and acquisitions professionals, equity
analysts, mid-level career transitions, lateral hires and small business owners.
Prerequisites: Undergraduate degree or equivalent, fluency in English, proficiency in
basic Excel™, word processing skills, basic knowledge of accounting (if not, must attend
Accounting Bootcamp). Financial calculator required.
Take the entire Core Skills Analyst Program and
save $4,075
Core Skills Analyst
Program with
Accounting Bootcamp
Dates March 31–April 25,
M
,
August 4–29,
M
Sessions 4 Weeks
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRCN1038
Instructor Various
Cost $12,850
CPE Credits 144.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Take the entire Core
Skills Analyst Program
with Accounting
Bootcamp and
save $5,850
Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com 4
Special Programs
Core Skills Analyst Program – Accounting Bootcamp q DBC
Dates January 28–February 1
S
(Bootcamp Only),
March 31–April 4
M
(CSA Program),
August 4–8
M
(CSA Program)
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code AATX1003
Instructor John Palicka/Lance Eckel
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The Accounting Bootcamp explores the core financial accounting tools that help
participants understand annual reports and footnotes. The module covers balance sheet
and cash flow statements along with basic accounting concepts related to key accounts
on the income statement. It also explains complex principles such as deferred taxes,
pensions, and accounting for stock options.
Problems, exercises, and case studies are employed to illustrate key principles.
Emphasis is on finding and analyzing information. Topics include:
Balance sheet and its components •
Effect of transactions on the balance •
sheet equation
Concept of accrual accounting •
Revenues and expenses and the •
income statement
Relationship of the income statement •
to the balance sheet
Single- and multiple-step income •
statements
Double entry accounting •
Analyze and record a transaction •
through the transaction cycle
Accounting adjustments •
Components of a balance sheet •
Inventory and accounts receivable •
valuation methods
Long-lived assets and depreciation •
Short- and long-term liabilities •
Contingent liabilities •
Concept of equity, shareholder rights, •
types of stocks
Exchanges and conversions •
Dividends •
Cash flow statement, describing free •
cash flow, U.S. GAAP, and IASB GAAP
Consolidations •
Deferred taxes, accounting for stock •
options, pension accounting
Who Should Attend: The program will benefit anyone who wishes to enhance their
existing skills and learn new ones. It should be of particular interest to: entry-level
professionals, investment professionals, research analyst, corporate bankers, fixed
income analysts, credit analysts, mergers and acquisitions professionals, equity
analysts, and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Core Skills Analyst Program, Advanced Corporate Finance,
Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions
Core Skills Analyst Program – Credit Risk Analysis q DBC
Dates April 7–11
M
, August 11–15
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRED2058
Instructors Henry Pullman, Patricia Sparacio,
& NYIF Instructor
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Credit Risk Analysis is never out of style. No matter which industry or department one
may work in, a solid grounding in credit risk fundamentals is required. This program
provides the tools and techniques required to perform a credit analysis. The focus is on
understanding the qualitative issues before performing the quantitative analysis. After
an historical risk analysis is carried out, participants perform financial forecasting, which
determines correct structuring. The class also explores financing alternatives, including
options in money and capital markets, seniority, protection and monitoring, holding
company analysis, subordination, covenants, and off-balance sheet items. Practice is
key, so there is ample opportunity to practice the analytical techniques learned in each
section. Topics include:
Credit, market, and operational risk •
The 5 Ps and 5 Cs of credit •
Sources of information •
Qualitative framework for analysis •
including business and industry
Cash conversion cycle •
Risks and mitigants •
Management considerations •
Regulatory and environmental issues •
Ratios and credit statistics •
Off-balance sheet considerations •
Cash flow analysis •
Forecasting and key value drivers •
Structuring and documentation •
Credit ratings •
Credit derivatives •
By the end of the module, students acquire the skills necessary to complete a credit risk
analysis. In addition, they have the chance to present the analysis of a case study and
receive feedback from faculty.
Who Should Attend: Entry-level professionals, investment professionals, research
analysts, corporate bankers, fixed income analysts, credit analysts, equity analysts,
mergers and acquisitions professionals, and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: Undergraduate degree or equivalent, fluency in English, proficiency in
basic Excel™, word processing skills. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Credit Risk Analysis, Corporate Failure Early Warning Signs
5 Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required
Special Programs
Core Skills Analyst Program – q DBC
Corporate Finance & Valuation Fundamentals
Dates April 14–18
M
, August 18–22
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRPF1018
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The Corporate Finance & Valuation Fundamentals module focuses on the primary tasks
of the corporate treasurer or financial analyst. The program covers the key principles
of corporate finance, including project analysis and capital budgeting, the time value
of money and various valuation concepts. Plus, participants are challenged to decide
a firm’s optimal capital structure. The basics of discounted cash flow shows how to
estimate a weighted average cost of capital to use as a discount rate appropriate to
a particular company or project. Alternative valuation techniques are also examined.
Topics include:
Time value of money •
Project analysis and capital budgeting •
Discounted cash flow basics •
Financial statement basics •
Private and public comparables •
Economic value added •
Financing alternatives •
Mergers and acquisitions •
Separation techniques •
Valuation concepts including terminal •
value, enterprise and equity value,
risk/return, the cost of debt and
equity, the weighted average cost of
capital, and capital structure
By the end of the module, participants have all the tools necessary to understand the
financing, investing, dividend, and valuation decisions corporations make each day.
Who Should Attend: Entry-level professionals, investment professionals, research
analysts, corporate bankers, fixed income analysts, credit analysts, equity analysts,
mergers and acquisitions professionals, and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Core Skills Analyst Program – Financial Modeling q DC
Dates January 7–11
M
(Module Only)
April 21–25
M
(CSA Program)
August 25–29
M
(CSA Program)
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code FIMD2034
Instructor Jim Morris
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The benefits of using spreadsheet modeling for financial management and valuation are
undisputed in the world of finance. This module provides hands-on modeling experience
that begins with construction of a basic financial model and ends with completion
of a full-scale forecasted model with valuation components. This module provides
practical modeling tips and techniques, as well as valuation tools for valuing a company
and determining the effects of mergers and acquisitions. Actual company financial
statements are used. Topics include:
Tips and tricks •
Linking sheets •
Multiple spreadsheet models •
Logical tests •
Look-up tables •
D functions •
String functions •
Data tables •
Consolidations •
Macros •
Scenarios •
Building financial models (pro-forma •
modeling)
Discounted cash flow analysis, •
estimated cost of capital, EVA
Market multiples, transaction •
multiples
Valuing debt and convertible •
securities, share repurchases
Warrant valuation and stock options •
Special valuation issues •
Who Should Attend: Entry-level professionals, investment professionals, research
analysts, corporate bankers, fixed income analysts, credit analysts, equity analysts,
mergers and acquisitions professionals, and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: Undergraduate degree or equivalent, fluency in English, proficiency in
basic Excel™, word processing skills. Financial calculator required.
Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com 6
Special Programs Special Programs
Introducing Wall Street – Evening q nB
Dates November 4–December 16
M
Sessions 7 Tuesday Evenings
Duration 5:30 pm–8:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1039
Instructor Various
Cost $1,875
CPE Credits 20.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This unique seven-evening program explores the products
and markets of Wall Street. Each session demystifies the
technical jargon, presents real-life case studies, and provides
the opportunity to meet people who know the inner workings
of Wall Street.
In addition to current practitioners, participants hear from
editors of the Financial Times, authors of highly acclaimed
finance books, and other guest speakers. Topics include:
An Overview of The Street •
Foreign Exchange •
Technical Analysis •
Derivatives and Risk •
Management
Macro Economics & •
Economic Indicators
Investment Banking & Asset •
Management
Equity Trading •
Who Should Attend: Introducing Wall Street is relevant
for anyone who comes in contact with finance either on a
professional or personal basis. This program is ideal for new
entrants to the finance field.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Derivatives I & II, Essentials of
Portfolio Management, Technical Analysis, Foreign Exchange
Marketplace
Introducing Wall Street – A Case Study Approach: One Week q DNBC
Dates March 24–28
M
,
September 22–26
D
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1039
Instructor Various
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this five-day course, participants will be exposed to all aspects of Wall Street, from
equities to fixed income and derivatives. What makes this course unique from our
evening Introduction to Wall Street is the use of a case study and in-depth discussion
of the topics. Participants will explore the fundamentals of Wall Street with a case study
that will carry throughout the week. Participants will have readings and homework each
night which will be debriefed in class.
At the end of this week, participants will:
Understand the capital markets and discuss the products used for the selected case •
study
Understand how the fixed income markets work with emphasis on the case study •
products
Discuss equities as a product and the alternatives and opportunities for the selected •
case
Analyze the credit profile of the selected case name and determine risk and mitigants •
Analyze the derivatives products used by the company and the company’s approach •
to risk management
Who Should Attend: Analysts, investment bankers, IT, back office personnel, legal
professionals, operations professionals
Prerequisites: Core Skills Analyst Program: Accounting Bootcamp or equivalent
accounting knowledge. Financial calculator required.
7 Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required
Special Programs
New Two-Week Special Program:
Technical Analysis and
Strategy Program
Technical Analysis – Principles and Theories q DN
Dates February 25–29
S
,
April 21–25
M
,
December 1–5
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC4000
Instructor Ralph Acampora
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This five-day program is an intensive introduction to technical analysis and its use as
an integral part of market analysis. Methodologies for construction and interpretation
of bar charts, point and figure charts, and candlestick charts are covered in depth. You
will learn how to best use and interpret results from software and subscription products
that automate and facilitate certain aspects of technical analysis. All supplemented with
assigned outside readings from textbooks that NYIF will provide.
Week One – Topics include:
Constructing and interpreting charts •
Four phases of price and activity •
Pattern recognition of bar, chart, point, •
figure and candlestick charting
Technical theories and indicators •
Intermarket analysis •
Students will be able to:
Construct four types of charts •
Identify trends and important •
price points
Recognize patterns •
Use technical indicators •
Apply technical theories •
Use electronic tools to facilitate •
analysis
Who Should Attend: Traders, portfolio managers, analysts, financial planners, brokers,
individual investors, and anyone making or influencing decisions as to when to buy or
sell securities.
Prerequisites: An undergraduate degree or equivalent. Fluency in English.
Follow-Up Courses: Technical Analysis – Advanced Technical Analysis/Real Time Usage
– Suite, CMT Preparatory Classes, and Fusion Analysis
Advanced Technical Analysis/Real Time Usage – Suite q DN
Dates March 3–7
S
, April 28–May 2
M
,
December 8–12
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code SPEC5000
Instructor Ralph Acampora
Cost $7, 000
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This five-day program is an intensive continuation of the “Principles and Theories”
program. You will examine the top-down approach to external and internal indicators
and undertake an in-depth analysis of U.S. and foreign equity markets, U.S. Treasurys,
currencies, and commodities. Emphasis will be placed on the use of software in creating
and interpreting charts. An examination will be held at the end of the week. You will
receive a certificate upon receiving a 70% or better grade.
Students will be able to: In the final examination on Day 5, the students will create their
own market forecast, including external and internal indicators, along with intermarket
analysis and style strategy— culminating with five buy and five sell recommendations.
Week Two – Topics include:
U.S. equity markets and major indexes •
– top-down approach to internal and
external indicators
Intermarket analysis – fixed income, •
commodities, currencies and foreign
equity markets
Style strategy sector analysis •
and group analysis
Top-down analysis of mid-cap groups, •
small-cap groups
Bottom-up approach of stock picking •
on a technical basis
Who Should Attend: Traders, portfolio managers, analysts, financial planners, brokers,
individual investors, and anyone making or influencing decisions as to when to buy or
sell securities.
Prerequisites: Technical Analysis - Basic Principles and Theories program.
Follow-Up Courses: CMT Preparatory Classes, Fusion Analysis
Special Programs ograms
Ralph Acampora, Course Director
Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com 8
Special Programs
Wealth Management
Grow & Protect – Now & for the Future
Wealth Management Program q DC
Dates July 7
M
Sessions 3 Weeks
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC4000
Instructor Various
Cost $9,950
CPE Credits 100.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
What does investment management mean to clients during their life and after they are
gone?
Grow wealth •
Protect wealth •
Provide liquidity •
Minimize taxes •
The New York Institute of Finance’s Wealth Management Program captures the best
practices and insights from corporate thought leaders and wealth management firms.
This modular suite of classes is designed to prepare client-facing professionals with the
knowledge and skills to meet and add value to wealthy individuals and families. Topics
include:
Global economic impact on wealth •
Consultative discussions and •
recommendations
Asset allocation and portfolio •
optimization
Lending and leverage •
Tax and intergenerational planning •
Maintaining good relationships with •
investment clients
Who Should Attend: New private bankers, new wealth advisors, brokers who are going
to cover broader wealth solutions, portfolio managers and other product specialists
requiring an in-depth overview of wealth management, and individuals working in the
finance arena.
Prerequisites: An undergraduate degree or equivalent. Fluency in English. Financial
caculator required. Knowledge of Microsoft™ Office Suite
How is the Program Structured?
The Wealth Management Program consists of eight core modules over three weeks:
Introduction to the Wealth Environment 1 Day •
Grow Wealth: Liquidity 2 Days •
Grow Wealth: Asset Management 2 Days •
Grow/Protect Wealth: Alternative Investments 2 Days •
Protect Wealth: International Estate Planning 3 Days •
Grow/Protect Wealth: Derivatives 2 Days •
Consultative Selling Skills to Investment Clients 2 Days •
Anti-Money Laundering 1 Day •
Introduction to the Wealth Environment q D
Dates July 7
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC1000
Instructor Bill Coda
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This introduction paints the big picture of the wealth environment and how it cycles
through changes. Participants learn the basics of global economics and how this
impacts wealth generations as well as the risks to maintaining wealth in all parts of the
world. Topics include:
Global economy •
Economic cycles •
Risk factors •
Impact on wealth creation & retention •
Prerequisites: None
Take the entire
Wealth Management
Program and
save $8,150
Special Programs
9 Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required
Special Programs Special Programs
Grow Wealth: Liquidity q D
Dates July 8–9
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC3000
Instructor Henry Pullman
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course explores the importance of liquidity to wealthy clients and how financial
institutions typically meet those needs. It examines the basics of client credit analysis,
loan structures, and regulations governing lending in the U.S. and how credit is used to
leverage other wealth-generating instruments. Topics include:
Client profile •
Types of borrowers •
Leveraging Investments •
5 Cs of credit •
Basic approval principles •
Risk ratings •
Collateral •
Major types of lending •
Prerequisites: Margin I: Introduction to Margin Regulations – Online and Margin II:
Advanced Margin for Options – Online, or equivalent knowledge.
Grow Wealth: Asset Management q D
Dates July 10–11
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC3001
Instructor James Davis
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This two-day course examines the basics of portfolio management using traditional
asset classes. Participants learn how to identify appropriate risk and return parameters
and how to explain asset allocation, diversification, and portfolio performance to clients.
Topics include:
Risk/return •
Standard asset classes •
Bonds -
Equities -
Asset allocation & optimization •
Securities selections •
Individual securities -
Funds -
Performance •
Prerequisites: Portfolio Management I – Online, Equities – Online, Fixed Income
Securities - Online or equivalent knowledge.
Grow/Protect Wealth: Alternative Investments q DC
Dates July 14–15
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC5000
Instructors John Palicka & Lance Eckel
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides a broad understanding of alternative investments required by many
sophisticated investors to both diversify and optimize portfolios and to reduce risk, as
well as to enhance portfolio performance. Participants learn how to identify and position
individual products to meet specific needs of clients. Topics include:
Increased interest to sophisticated •
investors
Institutional differentiator •
Solution •
Hedge funds •
Private equities •
Venture capital •
Commodities •
Real estate •
Prerequisites: Hedge Funds – Online or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator
required.
Protect Wealth: International Estate Planning q DC
Dates July 16–18
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC5002
InstructorS Roberta Ruddy James Donaldson
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this module, participants explore the complex world of tax and estate planning
structures in the U.S. and abroad. It analyzes client situations requiring formal planning
structures and which structures are best under specific circumstances during life and
after death. Participants examine the resulting implications of not planning and how to
have sensitive discussions with clients and prospects. Topics include:
Estate planning instruments: •
JTWROS, POAs, wills, -
Companies, trusts -
During life •
Incapacity -
Confidentiality -
Special needs -
Taxation -
Philanthropy -
and gifting
After death •
Confidentiality -
Probate -
Control -
Taxation -
Role of insurance in estate and tax •
planning
International issues •
Common Law - vs. Civil Law
jurisdictions
Tax haven and other regulatory -
changes
Solutions -
PICs •
Special categories •
Prerequisites: Overview of Trusts – Online or equivalent knowledge. Financial
calculator required.
Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com 10
Special Programs Special Programs
Grow/Protect Wealth: Derivatives q DC
Dates July 21–22
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC5001
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course explains the dual purposes of derivatives products for clients—to reduce
investment risk and to enhance investment performance. Participants learn how to
identify and position individual products to meet specific needs of clients. Topics
include:
Enhancements to performance •
Hedges against loss •
Appropriateness and risks •
Solutions •
Options -
Swaps -
Futures -
Interest rate -
FX -
Commodities -
Prerequisites: Derivative Instruments – Online, Options – Online, and Forwards &
Futures – Online, or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator required.
Consultative Selling Skills to Investment Clients q DC
Dates July 23–24
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC2000
Instructor James Davis
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Participants learn how to maintain and grow business in an increasingly sophisticated,
competitive and volatile market. This module explains how to speak confidently and
compellingly to clients about investments and their individual portfolios and to build
solid, lasting relationships with investment clients. Topics include:
The consultative process •
Investment experience -
Preferences -
Common language -
Investments and the economic cycle •
Typical business cycle -
Shape of yield curve through the -
cycle
When particular asset classes -
perform best/worst
Repairing a relationship •
Build an investment policy and asset •
allocation
Product/manager analysis & -
selection
Building a portfolio -
Sudden wealth •
Behavioral finance—an introduction •
Errors in judgment -
Overconfidence -
Optimism -
Hindsight bias -
Law of small numbers -
Errors of preference -
Risky behavior -
Mental accounting -
Choice and procrastination -
Fear of regret -
Dissatisfaction matrix -
Evaluate current investments and •
reposition the portfolio
Review performance and progress •
Rebalance -
Reallocate -
Preventative maintenance -
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Anti-Money Laundering q D
Dates March 17
M
(Module Only),
July 25
M
(Wealth Management
Program),
October 23
M
(Module Only)
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code OPST1032
Instructor Vincent Primerano
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course offers an introduction to Anti-Money Laundering with due diligence in
respect to knowing the customer accurately and authentically, and knowing their usual
business and associates coupled with an awareness of any money laundering activities
involving them or their account(s), initially or in the distant future.
This course is mandatory for all financial managers and employees involved with clients
and client accounts. Case studies are used to practice the concepts. Topics include:
Defining money laundering and examining why money is laundered •
Areas and products most commonly subject to money laundering •
How to know your customer •
Identifying red flags and suspicious activities •
What should be done if you are suspicious •
Forms, terms, and Federal compliance regulations •
Who Should Attend: All financial services managers and employees involved with
opening and monitoring customer accounts (regardless of type of account), private
banking relationship managers, and employees who process or monitor transactions
either isolated or in customer accounts.
Prerequisites: None.
11 Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required
Special Programs
Wealth Management Program: Additional Elective Courses
Know Your Client (KYC) ■ D
Dates July 28
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC1001
Instructor Patricia Sparacio
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students learn how to understand the total wealth picture of clients and how to use this
information to:
ascertain investment appropriateness •
verify that clients meet the firm’s standards and can cause no harm to the firm’s •
reputation
This introductory course provides participants with a basic understanding of information
as presented in financial statements. Students learn key financial concepts and how to
use balance sheets and income and cash flow statements received from their clients or
prospects to make decisions. Participants also learn how to ask key questions to solicit
information necessary to complete KYC requirements, especially from non-U.S. clients
where reporting is not as regulated as in the U.S. The program integrates two client
cases in small team exercises that allow participants to practice their skills in real-life
scenarios. Topics include:
Understanding forms of business and financial reporting •
Interpreting key financial statements •
The balance sheet and income statement •
The cash conversion cycle •
Using financial statements •
Who Should Attend: KYC officers, wealth management advisors, brokers, finance
professionals, private bankers new to the field.
Prerequisites: Wealth Management Program or equivalent experience.
Follow-Up Courses: Financial Statement Analysis, Demystifying Cash Flow, Anti-Money
Laundering
Corporate Finance & Financial Management ■ D
Solutions for Wealth Advisors
Dates July 29–30
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code SPEC1002
Instructor Patricia Sparacio
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course prepares participants with the tools needed to have comfortable and
confident business-focused discussions with business owner clients by learning the
basics of a company’s operations, finance, and management decisions. Participants
learn to identify opportunities based on an analysis of a company’s business using
actual financial information. Case studies help them better understand and implement
a client’s strategic goals, financial situation, issues and concerns. Regional variances are
discussed. Topics include:
Cash conversion cycle •
Risks and mitigants •
Business risk • vs. financial risk
Linking the investment, finance and •
dividend decision
Business, operations, and industry •
analysis
Working capital and working •
investment analysis
Project analysis and capital budgeting •
Cash flow analysis •
Management issues •
Financial forecasting •
Discounted cash flow •
Cost of capital and capital structure •
Financing alternatives •
Relative valuation techniques •
M&A separation techniques: spin-offs, •
SPVs, carve outs
Hedging raw materials, interest rate •
risk
Foreign exchange •
Off-balance sheet items – guarantees, •
LIs, SBLCs, PLCs, SPV, operating leases
Cash and treasury management •
Who Should Attend: Private bankers, wealth advisors, brokers, portfolio managers,
finance professionals.
Prerequisites: Wealth Management Program or equivalent knowledge, basic
knowledge of accounting concepts.
Follow-Up Courses: Essentials of Corporate Finance
Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com 12
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 13
Accounting & Tax: Accounting is the language of finance, and a solid grounding
in accounting is a requirement for any finance professional. The development of international disclosures,
auditing and governance standards, as well as convergence in global financial reporting, has led to the
need for finance industry professionals to become familiar with a whole new set of issues and rules.
These courses offer participants the opportunity to sharpen their skills and become familiar with key
requirements of accounting today.
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging ■ DB
Dates March 10–12
M
, June 23–25
D
,
September 15–17
M
,
November 10–12
D
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code AATX2050
Instructor Marc Cherney
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this three-day, revised course, participants learn to recognize and distinguish
between fair value and cash flow hedges and to apply FAS 133 and amendments to the
accounting for qualifying hedges. Beginning with an overview of derivatives and their
uses as hedging instruments, the course progresses from the fundamental applications
of hedge accounting treatment to more complex applications of FAS 133 and its
amendments. Group discussions, short examples, and case problems illustrate and
apply the concepts of hedging and hedge accounting. Topics include:
Qualifying for hedge accounting •
treatment
Testing for hedge effectiveness •
Hedging price risk for commodities •
Hedging interest rate risk, interest rate •
swaps, foreign currency hedges and
currency swaps
Identifying and accounting for •
embedded derivatives
Normal purchase and sales exclusions •
Internal controls over derivatives •
Recent developments in accounting for •
derivatives
Who Should Attend: Accountants, auditors, regulators, analysts, consultants, and
others who seek a broad, yet comprehensive, understanding of FAS 133 and its
amendments.
Prerequisites: A fundamental understanding of GAAP accounting principles. A basic
understanding of derivatives, such as forwards, futures and options, is also helpful.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions
Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions ■ DBC
Dates April 2
M
, December 3
M

Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code MANA3005
Instructor Jim Morris
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day intensive course presents an analyst’s approach to accounting for business
combinations. The program’s objectives focus on the application of financial accounting
and federal income tax principles for projecting earnings, accretion/dilution and cash
flows of the post-combination entity. Several of the items discussed are unique to
accounting for business combinations and are typically excluded in other financial
accounting courses. Topics include:
Purchase accounting for business •
combinations including long-term asset
write-ups and write-downs
Goodwill adjustments •
LIFO inventories •
Deferred tax items •
Net operating losses and forecasting •
the performance of a combined
company including accretion/dilution
analysis, synergies, and cash flow
effects
Who Should Attend: Financial analysts/managers, bankers, strategic planning
professionals, financial decision-makers in corporations, corporate finance lawyers,
corporate finance accountants, financial management consultants, market regulators
and professionals interested in the accounting analysis of M&A transactions.
Prerequisites: Participants should have a solid understanding of financial accounting
and of mergers and acquisitions concepts and structures. Financial calculator required.
14 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Accounting & Tax
Advanced Financial Accounting Topics ■ nBC
Dates April 7
M
, November 3
M
Sessions 5 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Advanced
Code AATX2036
Instructor Jim Morris
Cost $1,675
CPE Credits 13.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Using a case-based approach to explore advanced financial accounting and financial
statement auditing issues and topics, participants explore the financial accounting
and financial statement auditing areas that have been problematic to corporations and
auditors in recent years. Topics include:
Revenue recognition methods •
Irregular items and EPS alternative •
methods of revenue recognition
Consolidations, SPEs, related party •
transactions and auditor independence
Restatements, errors, and changes •
Historical cost, fair value, and •
impairment
Asset impairment •
Derivatives •
Who Should Attend: Financial managers, investors, research analysts, credit and
financial analysts or anyone wanting a more detailed understanding of financial
accounting concepts and auditing issues.
Prerequisites: Introduction to Financial Accounting or equivalent knowledge. Financial
calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives and Hedging, Comparing U.S. GAAP and
IFRS, Demystifying Cash Flow, Financial Statement Analysis, Transparency in Financial
Statements
Brokerage Accounting ■ D
Dates February 4–5
M
,
September 22–23
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code AATX2008
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Participants learn how to assess the effects of a firm’s own transactions on its capital,
financial statements, and reports with an emphasis on regulatory requirements.
This course highlights the basic economics of securities transactions, stock record
accounting, accounting for trade settlement (CNS, fails), procedures for the firm’s
own accounts, margin requirements, overview of SEC Rule 15c3-3, and net capital
computations (SEC Rule 15c3-1).
Who Should Attend: Accounting and compliance staff, operations managers, internal
audit staff, data processing managers.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Corporate Treasury Management, Comparing U.S. GAAP and IFRS
Comparing U.S. GAAP and ■ DB
International Financial Reporting Standards
Dates May 28–30
M
,
November 10–12
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code AATX2059
Instructor Gary Bulmash / Jim Morris
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Recent actions have confirmed that all listed companies in the European Union are
obligated to use International Financial and Reporting Standards (IFRS) issued by the
International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) from 2005. This course discusses the
differences between U.S. GAAP and IFRS, highlighting these differences by using actual
reconciliations between the two standards prepared by SEC registrants.
Who Should Attend: Accountants, analysts, investor relations executives, and
any other professionals who require an understanding of the changing world of
international accounting.
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of accounting.
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Financial Accounting Topics
Accounting & Tax
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 15
Core Skills Analyst Program – Accounting Bootcamp ■ DBC
Dates January 28–February 1
S

(Bootcamp Only),
March 31–April 4
M
(CSA Program),
August 4–8
M
(CSA Program)
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code AATX1003
Instructor John Palicka / Lance Eckel
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The Accounting Bootcamp explores the core financial accounting tools that help
participants understand annual reports and footnotes. The module covers balance sheet
and cash flow statements, along with basic accounting concepts related to key accounts
on the income statement. It also explains complex principles such as deferred taxes,
pensions, and accounting for stock options.
Problems, exercises, and case studies are employed to illustrate key principles.
Emphasis is on finding and analyzing information. Topics include:
Balance sheet and its components •
Effect of transactions on the balance •
sheet equation
Concept of accrual accounting •
Revenues and expenses and the income •
statement
Relationship of the income statement to •
the balance sheet
Single- and multiple-step income •
statements
Double entry accounting •
Analyze and record a transaction and •
record it through the transaction cycle
Accounting adjustments •
Components of a balance sheet •
Inventory and accounts receivable •
valuation methods
Long-lived assets and depreciation •
Short- and long-term liabilities •
Contingent liabilities •
Concept of equity, shareholder rights, •
types of stocks
Exchanges and conversions •
Dividends •
Cash flow statement, describing free •
cash flow, U.S. GAAP and IASB GAAP
Consolidations •
Deferred taxes, accounting for stock •
options, pension accounting
Who Should Attend: Entry-level professionals, investment professionals, research
analysts, corporate bankers, fixed income analysts, credit analysts, equity analysts,
mergers and acquisitions professionals, mid-level career transitions, lateral hires, and
small business owners.
Prerequisites: Undergraduate degree or equivalent, fluency in English, proficiency in
basic Excel™, word processing skills. Financial calculator required
Follow-Up Courses: Core Skills Analyst Program, Advanced Corporate Finance,
Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions
Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3 ■ D
Dates January 22
D
, June 18
M
,
October 7
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code OPST2006
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students examine the Customer Protection Rule, its possession and control
requirements, and the departments involved in compliance with such requirements.
Topics include:
Reserve formula and its rationale and relationship to balance sheet and non-balance •
sheet items
Basic allocation process and its relationship to the stock record •
Who Should Attend: Accounting and compliance staff, operations managers, internal
auditors, data processing managers.
Prerequisites: Brokerage Accounting or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Brokerage Operations
16 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Accounting & Tax
Inter-Company Investments and Consolidated Financial Statements ■ DN
Date April 23–24
D
,
September 8–9
M
Session 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code AATX3001
Instructor Chris Broderick
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course will cover the accounting for investments in debt and equity securities, and
investments in net assets as a prelude to understanding consolidations of financial
statements. The consolidation of financial statements will be covered in detail, including
understanding the elimination of inter-company dividends, inter-company transactions,
and inter-company accounts. Goodwill and other adjustments are covered, along with
the creation and adjustments to Minority Equity.
Who Should Attend: The program will benefit anyone who wishes to enhance their
existing skills and learn new ones. It should be of particular interest to: entry-level
finance professionals, investment professionals, research analysts, corporate bankers,
fixed income analysts, credit analysts, mergers and acquisition professionals, equity
analysts and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: Core Skills Analyst Program Accounting Bootcamp.
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Financial Accounting Topics, Accounting for Derivatives
& Hedging, Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions
Intermediate Accounting Topics: ■ DN
Leases, Pensions, and Deferred Taxes
Dates February 4–5
M
, June 12–13
D
,
December 8–9
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30pm
Level Intermediate
Code AATX3000
Instructor Chris Broderick
Cost $2,375
CPE Credit 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course covers present and future values in financial reporting, leases, pensions and
deferred taxes in more detail than offered in the Accounting Bootcamp course. After
a general review of the concepts of present and future values in financial reporting,
the focus is on the structure and reporting of leases and pensions, which potentially
represent significant off-balance sheet risk to a company. The course then examines
accounting for taxes for financial reporting purposes, including a discussion and
examples of permanent differences, temporary differences (and the resulting reporting
of deferred taxes), and net operating losses (NOLs).
Who Should Attend: The program will benefit anyone who wishes to enhance their
existing skills and learn new ones. It should be of particular interest to: entry-level
finance professionals, investment professionals, research analysts, corporate bankers,
fixed income analysts, credit analysts, mergers and acquisition professionals, equity
analysts, and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: Core Skills Analyst Program: Accounting Bootcamp or equivalent basic
accounting.
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Financial Accounting Topics, Accounting for Derivatives
& Hedging, Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions
Introduction to Financial Accounting ■ DnBC
Dates February 12–13
S
, June 11–12
S
,
November 12–13
S
,
December 3–4
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1002
Instructor Chris Broderick
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates January 28
M
,
April 28
M
,
September 8
M
Sessions 10 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1001
Instructor Michael Parks
Cost $2,275
CPE Credits 27.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
An in-depth introduction to accounting basics. Accounting theory and financial
statements are discussed in detail and real-life applications are reviewed through
practical examples and exercises. Topics include:
Accounting cycle components •
Balance sheet functions •
Income statement analysis •
Cash flow analysis •
Accounting methods for long-term debt •
and investments
Who Should Attend: Financial managers, investors, research analysts, credit and
financial analysts.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Financial Accounting Topics, Accounting for Derivatives
& Hedging, Comparing U.S. GAAP and IFRS, Demystifying Cash Flow, Financial Statement
Analysis, Transparency in Financial Statements
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 17
Accounting & Tax
Tax Concepts for Finance ■ D
Dates February 11–12
D
, May 6–7
D
,
October 27–28
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code AATX1004
Instructor Paul Kushel
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This two-day course is designed to give those in finance functions a working knowledge
of tax law and an appreciation for the impact it has on finance decisions. By developing
tax literacy and awareness, participants achieve a better understanding and recognition
of tax issues, aiding in their ability to converse with clients, colleagues, and tax
professionals about tax-related matters. The course provides an understanding of how
tax considerations alter the structuring of business transactions.
The course does not require specific prior knowledge and uses a lecture format with
numerous examples to reinforce the concepts. A wide spectrum of taxation topics is
explored, including:
Business entities •
Tax aspects of mergers and acquisitions •
Property transactions •
International tax considerations •
Who Should Attend: Investment bankers, commercial bankers, relationship managers,
and anyone working in the finance function.
Prerequisites: None
Transparency in Financial Statements ■ DC
Dates April 7
D
, September 25
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRCN2025
Instructor Valisha Graves
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this one-day course, participants learn how to identify common earnings quality
issues by examining the MD&A, accounting policy and footnote sections of corporate
financial reports, primarily SEC 10-K and proxies, from a forensic accounting perspective.
The instructor uses real-world case studies to illustrate key concepts.
Who Should Attend: Equity research analysts, investors, and financial analysts.
Prerequisites: Solid understanding of fundamental accounting principles and financial
statement analysis or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Demystifying Cash Flow, Corporate Failure – Early Warning Signs
18 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Alternative Investments: Alternative investments are asset categories that
are characterized by complex and illiquid, securities where proprietary information and sophisticated
investment strategies offer the opportunity to earn investment returns in excess of those generally
available in the traditional financial markets. These investments include: real estate, hedge funds, venture
capital, private equity and commodities.Alternative Investments have seen tremendous growth and
acceptance in the financial marketplace as investors look to diversify risk and enhance yield. Join us for
one of our alternative investments courses taught by industry practitioners.
Advanced Hedge Funds ■ DN
Dates March 19
M
, June 10
M
,

September 17
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate / Advanced
Code INVE4001
Instructor Chris Tidmore
Cost $1,475
CPE Credit 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course follows on from the NYIF Hedge Funds course but examines in greater detail
the investment strategies of hedge funds and the related world of hedge funds and their
application. Participants who attended the Hedge Funds program will experience some
overlap of the basic material. However, they should be prepared for a more in-depth
and quantitative examination of the various hedge funds strategies including managed
futures. This is an intermediate level course on hedge funds and not intended for those
who have extensive experience working for, or with, hedge funds.
Who Should Attend: Anyone who needs a thorough understanding of basic hedge
funds strategies, the risks involved, and their application in the context of an overall
portfolio.
Prerequisites: Attendees would benefit from prior basic knowledge of capital markets
and derivatives. Hedge funds course or equivalent knowledge would be helpful.
Hedge Funds ■ D
Dates January 15
S
, March 5
M
,
May 13
D
, June 5
S
,
August 12
S
, October 8
M
,
December 10
D
, December 16
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE2026
Instructors Lance Eckel / Chris Tidmore
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Hedge funds are one of the fastest growing, yet probably least understood, sectors of the
asset management industry. This course presents a detailed and comprehensive picture
of the hedge funds industry. Topics include:
Hedge funds industry and strategies •
Regulations, registration, and operations •
Evaluation measures of performance •
Considerations for investors •
Issues facing the industry •
Who Should Attend: Employees of funds, family offices, private client financial
service providers, individual investors, and others involved directly or indirectly in the
development, offering, marketing and investing in hedge funds.
Prerequisites: Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets or equivalent knowledge of securities
investment.
Follow-Up Courses: Introduction to Alternative Investments, Portfolio Management
Suite, Wealth Management Program, Advanced Hedge Funds
Introduction to Alternative Investments ■ D
Dates June 4–5
M
, August 13–14
M
,
December 9–10
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE2032
Instructors John Palicka & Lance Eckel
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course gives an introductory look at alternative investments for the individual
investor, including real estate, hedge funds, venture capital, private equity, and
commodities. Topics include:
Rationale for the asset classes in terms of risk-vs. return and diversification •
Special factors such as liquidity and fund structures •
General valuation techniques •
Who Should Attend: Financial analysts, individual investors, asset allocators,
high-net-worth managers, specialist and financial planners.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Portfolio Management Suite, Hedge Funds, Structured Products,
Convertible Bonds
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 19
Alternative Investments
Introduction to Private Equity Investments ■ DC
Dates April 10
M
, August 25
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE3005
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this one-day course, students learn the role of private equity investments. Starting
with a basic description of private equity, this course shows the potential rewards and
risks within the context of portfolio theory. In addition to discussing the investment
characteristics, students compare private equity investments to traditional stock
and bond investments. Also, comparisons are made to commodities and real estate
investments. The course also covers key regulatory requirements, marketing issues, and
client reporting practices. Topics include:
Core concepts of private equity •
investments
Suitability requirements for investors •
Appeal of middle market investing •
J-Curve Angst strategies •
Differentiating private equity from •
venture capital and hedge funds
Buyout structure •
Calculating appropriate returns for a •
private equity fund
Key exit strategies of a private equity •
investment
Key reporting measures of a private •
equity fund
Analyzing commodity and real estate •
investments
Who Should Attend: Private equity relationship managers, alternative investment and
private equity portfolio managers, consultants and gatekeepers to asset allocation,
private client financial service providers, individual investors, and others involved
directly or indirectly in the development, offering, marketing, and investing in
alternative investments.
Prerequisites: A background in finance and accounting. Financial calculator (TI BA II
Plus) required.
Follow-Up Courses: Essentials of Corporate Finance, Portfolio Management – Theory &
Practice, Hedge Funds, Fusion Analysis, Stock Investing for Professionals
The Hype and Myth Surrounding Private Equity & Hedge Funds ■ DN
Dates TBD
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 a.m. – 4:30 p.m.
Level Introductory
Code DERV1024
Instructor Jeffrey Hooke
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group - Live
Method
This course explains the futility facing the institutional investor and wealthy individual
considering a major commitment to (i) leveraged buyout funds; (ii) venture capital funds;
or (iii) hedge funds. Despite the marketing hype and media reporting to the contrary,
these funds do not beat the returns of a passive S&P 500 index portfolio. Nevertheless,
in defiance of financial logic, such funds attract huge numbers of new clients.
Who Should Attend: High net-worth managers, alternative investment and private
equity portfolio managers, consultants and gatekeepers to asset allocation managers,
private client financial service providers, individual investors and others directly or
indirectly involved in buying into leveraged buyout, venture capital and hedge funds.
Prerequisites: None
20 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
CFA
®
/ CMT Exam Prep
Why study for the CFA
®
Exam with the New York Institute of Finance?
Money Back Guarantee
Students who attend all the sessions, hand in their homework, take the exam and don’t
pass, can choose to either receive a refund** or repeat the class for free.
Small Class Sizes
Each class is limited to 45 people, so students don’t find themselves sitting in a huge
auditorium surrounded by hundreds of people. In smaller classes, students feel more
comfortable asking questions and participating in discussions.
Knowledgeable and Approachable Expert Instructors
Instructors are CFA
®
charter holders who not only lead in the classroom, but also
manage several Wall Street funds. They have the practical knowledge and expertise to
use real-life examples, ensuring that the class materials are fresh and relevant.
Flexible Classes
At Level I, the 18-session review class is available twice a week in midtown giving
students the freedom to choose the day that suits their schedule. Students enrolled in
the Level I suite have the flexibility to attend any weekly class and still qualify for the
guarantee.
Level I
CFA ■
®
Exam Level I Review Suite C
Dates January 16
M
,

August*
M
Sessions Various
Duration Various
Code EXAM2022
Cost $3,750
Save $595
The Level I Suite includes all the tools necessary to succeed:
CFA •
®
Exam Level I 18-Session Review Class
CFA •
®
Core Concepts: Quantitative Methods
CFA •
®
Core Concepts: Accounting
CFA •
®
Exam Level I Problem Solving
CFA ■
®
Exam Level I 18-Session Review Class DnC
Dates January 16
M
, August*
M
Sessions 18 Evenings
Duration 5:30 pm–8:30 pm
Code EXAM2001
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Cost $1,895
Dates January 19
M
,
August*
M
Sessions 18 Afternoons
Duration 1:00 pm–4:00 pm
Code EXAM2002
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Cost $1,895
CFA
®
candidates must purchase the
TI BA II Plus calculator for use in class.
Professional standards on Wall Street increasingly require the CFA
®
charter of its
investment and finance professionals—but over 80% of those who attempt the series of
exams required to attain the designation never succeed. New York Institute of Finance
can help!
This comprehensive, weekly course covers all CFA
®
Institute requirements and learning
outcome statements and is covered by our exclusive money back guarantee.**
There is no substitute for spending time mastering the curriculum, and we wish to
remind candidates that our courses are to be used as a support to their preparation and
not an alternative.
Topics include:
The time value of money •
Quantitative methods •
Economics •
Financial statement analysis •
Debt investments •
Derivatives •
Alternative investments •
Equity investments •
Corporate finance •
Portfolio management •
and securities markets
Ethics •
Don’t just take the
CFA
®
Exam –
Take it Seriously!
The CFA
®
exam isn’t just any test. It is
a serious exam that requires serious
preparation.
New York Institute of Finance offers
comprehensive review classes that cover
the most important topics of the exam—
not just test hints and tips. Each program
ensures students don’t miss a single CFA
®

Institute learning outcome statement and
focuses on the key elements necessary to
accelerate learning and maximize success.
2008 CFA
®
Curriculum Books will be
provided by the CFA
®
Institute upon
registration for the CFA
®
Exam.
New York Institute of Finance is a participating provider in the CFA
®
Institute Prep Provider Guidelines Program.
CFA
®
/ CMT Exam Prep
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 21
CFA ■
®
Core Concepts: Quantitative Methods DC
Dates January 26
M
, August*
M
Sessions Saturday, 6 Mornings
Duration 9:00 am–12:00 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code EXAM2009
Cost $950
Statistical applications are a critical part of the CFA
®
Exam and an area many candidates
struggle with during the preparation process. This class is a great introduction to
statistics for candidates with a limited background in this area. It is also an ideal
refresher for those already familiar with statistics. The program covers all the statistics
included in the CFA
®
Exam, specifically probability (continuous probability distributions
and binomial probability), inferential and descriptive statistics and simple regression
analysis. Financial calculator required. Please note that the Quantitative Methods course
is not covered by the money back guarantee.
CFA ■
®
Core Concepts: Accounting DC
Dates March 8
M
, Fall*
M
Sessions Saturday, 6 Mornings
Duration 9:00 am–12:00 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code EXAM2030
Cost $950
Accounting knowledge is a key part of the CFA
®
Exam and is considered by many
teachers and students to be the most demanding in terms of rules and complex
calculations. In addition, it provides the foundation for a number of other subjects in the
CFA
®
curriculum. This class covers all the accounting that is included in the CFA
®
Exam:
accounting principles and practices, financial statement disclosure and ratio analysis,
cash and liquidity analysis, and specific asset/liability accounting issues. Accounting
may draw on other disciplines and this course will address these situations. Financial
calculator required. Please note that the Accounting course is not covered by the money
back guarantee.
CFA ■
®
Exam Level I Weeklong Intensive Review DC
Dates May 19–23
M
, Fall*
M
Sessions Monday–Friday, 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–5:00 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code EXAM2027
Cost $1,650
With only a few weeks left until one of the most difficult exams you’ll ever take, it’s time
to ask, “Am I really prepared?” Individual study is crucial, but group work can boost
individual efforts. The intensive review class covers the most important topics of the
exam—not just test hints and tips. Instructors make sure participants don’t miss a single
CFA
®
Institute learning outcome statement, focusing on the key elements necessary to
accelerate the review and maximize success. Financial calculator required. Please note
that the Intensive Review course is not covered by the money back guarantee.
CFA ■
®
Exam Level I Problem Solving DC
Dates April 19
M
, Fall*
M
Sessions Saturday, 3 Mornings
Duration 9:00 am–12:00 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code EXAM2017
Cost $550
Extensive problem-solving exercises are key to CFA
®
Exam success and are an excellent
way to focus studies and supplement the review course. Participants work closely with
an instructor through several original complex questions drawn from the most difficult
and important areas of the exam, including Financial Statement Analysis, Quantitative
Methods, Corporate Finance, Debt Investments, Portfolio Management, and Derivatives.
Financial calculator required. Please note that the Problem Solving Course is not covered
by the money back guarantee.
CFA Institute does not endorse, promote, or warrant the accuracy or quality of the products or services offered by the New York Institute of
Finance or verify or endorse the pass rates claimed by New York Institute of Finance. CFA Institute, CFA
®
and Chartered Financial Analyst
®
are
trademarks owned by CFA Institute.
*Date to be determined. Please see website.
** Refunds will be minus a small administrative fee. Alternatively, in place of a tuition refund, you may attend a future CFA
®
exam review
course at no additional charge. Delegates enrolled in the CFA
®
Exam Level I Review Suite are eligible for a refund in the amount of the
18-session Review Class only, minus a small administrative fee. To be eligible for the guarantee, attendees must attend all sessions of
the review, sign the class register book within 30 minutes of the beginning of each class session, and must hand in all assignments on
schedule. For more information on the guarantee, call our Customer Care Team at (212) 641-6616.
Attendance at a CFA
®
Exam preparation at the New York Institute of Finance course does not guarantee a passing grade on the CFA
®
exam.
CFA
®
Exam preparation courses at the New York Institute of Finance are not a substitute for individual study and preparation.
CFA
®
/ CMT Exam Prep
22 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Level II
CFA ■
®
Exam Level II 18-Session Review nC
Dates January 15
M
Sessions Tuesday, 18 Evenings
Duration 5:30 pm–8:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code EXAM2010
Cost $1,895
This comprehensive, weekly course covers all CFA
®
Institute requirements and learning
outcome statements, and is covered by New York Institute of Finance’s exclusive money
back guarantee.**
There is no substitute for spending time mastering the curriculum, and we wish to
remind candidates that our courses are to be used as a support to their preparation and
not an alternative. Topics include:
Quantitative methods •
Financial statement analysis •
Corporate finance •
Equity investments •
Debt investments •
Derivative investments •
Portfolio management •
Economics •
Ethics and professional standards •
CFA ■
®
Exam Level II Problem Solving DC
Dates April
M
+
Sessions 2 Saturdays
Duration 9:00 am–4:00 pm
Level Intermediate / Advanced
Code EXAM2024
Cost $650
Extensive problem-solving exercises are a key to CFA
®
Exam success and are an
excellent way to focus your studies and supplement the review course. Students work
closely with an instructor through several original complex questions drawn from the
most difficult and important areas of the exam, including: Financial statement analysis,
quantitative methods, corporate finance, debt investments, portfolio management, and
derivatives.
CMT Examination Preparation / Technical Analysis ■ DB
Dates July 9–10
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Instructor John Palicka
Code TECH4000
Cost $2,375
This comprehensive program is designed to prepare students for the Level I Chartered
Market Technicians (CMT) exam, which is the professional accreditation developed by
the Market Technicians Association (MTA) for Technical Analysts. Through methods of
charting, candidates understand trends and momentum and the basics of indicators
used to technically analyze the bond, commodity, currency, equity, futures and options
markets. The course also explores ethical and professional standards. Topics include:
Chart pattern interpretations •
Momentum •
Relative strength •
Volume techniques •
Sentiment analysis •
Intermarket analysis •
Special technical analyses in areas •
such as:
Point and Figure -
Gann -
Elliott Wave -
Cycle Analysis -
Japanese Candlesticks -
Who Should Attend: Securities dealers, financial advisors, financial planners, financial
investment analysts, and individuals interested in trading and the financial markets.
Prerequisites: None
+ Please see website for specific date information.
** Refunds will be minus a small administrative fee. Alternatively, in place of a tuition refund, you may attend a future CFA
®
exam review
course at no additional charge. To be eligible for the guarantee, attendees must attend all sessions of the review, sign the class register
book within 30 minutes of the beginning of each class session, and must hand in all assignments on schedule. For more information on the
guarantee, call our Customer Care Team at 212-641-6616.
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 23
Core Finance Concepts: Professionals who are new to the industry
and those in need of a refresher will be able to broaden their knowledge and gain a sound overview of
finance with these introductory- and intermediate-level courses. The wide selection of courses provides
professionals with a solid foundation in one of the most versatile and fascinating industries.

Corporate Treasury Management ■ D
Dates March 10–13
D
,
December 8–11
M
Sessions 4 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code OPST3004
Instructor Ken Parkinson
Cost $3,975
CPE Credits 28.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This four-day, highly practical course offers a thorough grounding in treasury
management tools and techniques. The course enables participants to maximize cash
flows for their organization through effective fund allocation while minimizing risk using
appropriate measurement and management strategies. Topics include:
Role of the corporate treasurer in today’s challenging global economy •
Measurement and management of risk—interest rate, foreign currency, and liquidity •
Effective use of money market and capital market products •
Role of derivative instruments in treasury management, including swaps and credit •
derivatives
Who Should Attend: Corporate treasury executives, FX & money market managers, CFOs,
treasury back office personnel, auditors and accountants, regulators, fund managers.
Prerequisites: Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets or equivalent knowledge of capital
markets.
Follow-Up Courses: Asset Liability Management
Economic Indicators: Clues to the Future ■ DB
Dates February 14–15
M
,
October 2–3
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN3002
Instructor Bernard Baumohl
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Every day, stocks, bonds, and currencies bounce wildly in response to new economic
indicators. Money managers obsess over those statistics because they provide crucial
clues about the future of the economy and the financial markets. This course, based on
the instructor’s popular book, The Secrets of Economic Indicators published by Wharton
School Publishing, examines the hidden clues to future economic trends and how to use
the information for investment opportunities. Topics include:
What the numbers really mean to stocks, bonds, rates, currencies, and the investor •
Spotting turning points in the economy and being able to call recessions and •
recoveries in time to profit
Decoding initial unemployment claims, housing starts, the yield curve, and other •
predictors
Foreign indicators: why they are increasingly important and how to use them •
Accessing data on free resources •
Who Should Attend: Entry-level professionals, investment professionals, research
analysts, corporate bankers, fixed income analysts, credit analysts, equity analysts,
mergers and acquisitions professionals, and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: None
Energy Markets ■ D
Dates May 14–15
M
,
November 24–25
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1043
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course focuses on the major political, technical, and economic factors moving
electricity, oil, and gas markets and how these sectors are interrelated. The course
evaluates the influences of recent developments in OPEC on energy markets, Petrodollar
movements and Russia, and discusses the increasing role of regulators. It also examines
how major market players, such as oil companies, banks, and hedge funds, move
energy prices; and analyzes the impact on fixed income, equity markets, and financial
institutions. Case studies include BP, Amaranth, and Enron. Topics include:
Political, economic and technical influences on energy markets •
Electricity sector and energy players and regulators •
Regulators and energy markets •
Who Should Attend: Finance analysts and associates, bankers, traders, investment
bankers, country officers, and commodity finance professionals.
Prerequisites: None
Core Finance Concepts
24 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Essentials of Banking ■ D
Dates February 13–14
D
, June 9–10
M
,
November 3–4
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1032
Instructor Henry Pullman
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides an overview of the fundamental principles underlying the money
and banking system in the United States. Topics include:
Monetary base •
Main instruments of monetary policy and theory •
Structure of the Federal Reserve System •
Discussion of the theory and implementation of monetary policy •
Who Should Attend: Commercial bankers, financial analysts, and others who want a
basic understanding of money and banking.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis, Essentials of U.S. Capital
Markets
Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets ■ D
Dates January 29–31
M
,
April 28–30
D
,
May 19–21
S
,
September 9–11
M
,
October 21–23
S

Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN2019
Instructor Henry Pullman
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
With an emphasis on equities, fixed income, the trading function and the process of
portfolio management, this course provides an introduction to the capital markets in the
U.S. Participants gain insight into investment decision-making and how the trading floor
operates. Topics include:
Macro economic environment •
Equities and convertibles •
Fixed income basics •
Derivative instruments •
Who Should Attend: Investors, research analysts, portfolio managers, traders, and new
entrants to the financial services industry.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: International Capital Markets
Finance Essentials for the Professional ■ DB
Dates March 17–18
D
, June 23–24
M
,
September 17–18
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1034
Instructor Robert Jozkowski
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides a basic understanding of financial management. It demonstrates
how to read and understand key elements of financial statements and reports.
Balance sheets, income statements, and cash flow statements are also reviewed, and
participants learn how to apply basic finance and accounting principles to budget
preparation and analysis.
Who Should Attend: Operations managers, project managers, program managers,
department heads, and anyone wishing to develop a basic understanding of finance.
Prerequisites: None
Core Finance Concepts
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 25
Financial Analysis of Insurance Companies ■ DC
Dates March 17–18
M
,
September 22–23
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRED3002
Instructor Marc Cherney
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Analyzing insurance companies is very different from analyzing corporations and
therefore presents unique challenges and industry-specific issues. In this fast-paced
two-day course, participants learn the financial analytical techniques to assess financial
strength and operating performance of property & casualty and life & health insurance
companies domiciled in the United States.
Beginning with an overview of statutory and GAAP accounting for insurance companies,
the course quickly progresses to more complex accounting and reporting issues, such
as reinsurance, reserving practices, investment valuation, and impairment. This course
provides an excellent foundation for understanding and analyzing statutory statements
and ratios, markets and regulatory issues, valuation issues, risks, reserve concepts,
rating agency assessments, early warning signs, management issues, and current
trends in the industry. The course format includes a combination of group discussions,
short examples and case problems to illustrate and apply the concepts of insurance
accounting and financial analysis. Topics include:
Statutory accounting •
GAAP accounting •
Major SAP to GAAP differences •
Impact of reinsurance •
Rating agency financial measures •
Capital adequacy analysis •
Operations analysis •
Financial forecasting •
Potential impacts of IFRS •
Who Should Attend: Banking, insurance, and credit risk professionals, analysts,
associates, and auditors.
Prerequisites: A basic understanding of accounting and insurance products.
Financial calculator required.
Financial Forecasting Concepts and Applications ■ Dn
Dates October 2
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRCN 3005
Instructor James McDonnell
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates February 27–28
D
Sessions 2 Evenings
Duration 5:30 pm–8:00 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRCN3006
Instructor James McDonnell
Cost $850
CPE Credit 3.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This program is intended for the experienced financial analyst, corporate banker, or
credit executive that needs to develop or refresh knowledge of forecasting concepts
and techniques. This one-day program provides a value-added, comprehensive, and
intensive immersion into the art of preparing and interpreting financial forecasts. This
knowledge is indispensable to bankers and analysts wishing to further their careers in all
aspects of commercial and investment banking, including syndications, deal origination,
credit and underwriting, and M&A.
Who Should Attend: Anyone who has an interest in credit analysis, underwriting, or
corporate banker roles looking to expand or review their understanding and ability to
apply forecasting concepts and tools.
Prerequisites: Attendance at a credit training program or equivalent corporate banking
experience. Prior financial modeling experience is helpful, but not required.
Core Finance Concepts
26 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Financial Statement Analysis ■ DnB
Dates May 12–13
M
, November 10–11
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRCN2006
Instructor Robert Rossetti
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates March 5
M
, September 10
M
Sessions 10 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRCN2005
Instructor Robert Rossetti
Cost $2,275
CPE Credits 25.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The focus of this course is on the assessment of business performance through analysis
of financial statements, as well as valuation of off-balance sheet obligations and
commitments. Topics include:
Managing operating funds •
Financial ratio analysis •
Cost of capital and business decisions •
Projections of financial requirements •
Who Should Attend: Analysts, investment advisors, credit analysts, compliance staff,
auditors, and others making investment and lending decisions.
Prerequisites: Introduction to Financial Accounting or knowledge of financial
accounting principles.
Follow-Up Courses: Demystifying Cash Flow, Transparency in Financial Statements,
Corporate Failure – Early Warning Signs, Credit Risk Analysis
Foreign Exchange Marketplace ■ DnBC
Dates March 27–28
D
,
December 11–12
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code FREX1004
Instructor Cornelius Luca
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates May 22
M
, September 25
D
Sessions 6 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code TRAD1006
Instructor Cornelius Luca
Cost $1,775
CPE Credits 16.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course focuses on one of the most profitable markets: foreign exchange.
Participants learn in detail what makes these markets tick and how traders and analysts
make their decisions. Topics include:
Exchange rate determination, trading methods, central bank intervention, hedging and •
speculating interests
Scope and mechanics of the spot, forwards, swap and futures markets •
Hands-on practice in calculating different forward, swap and futures prices •
Who Should Attend: New FX traders and investors, foreign exchange staff in
commercial banks, middle office, auditors, securities firms, insurance companies and
corporations, analysts, and junior traders.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Risk Management Suite, Derivatives Suite
Core Finance Concepts
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 27
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry ■ DnB
Dates March 27–28
D
, June 19–20
M
,
October 16–17
M
,
December 11–12
D

Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1016
Instructor William Jannace
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates January 13
M
, April 24
M
,
September 10
M
Sessions 10 Evenings
Duration 5:30 pm–8:00 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1015
Instructor Arthur Caione, Sr.
Cost $2,275
CPE Credits 25.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Understanding the foundations of the securities industry is essential to anyone working
in this field. This course examines the terminology, principle players, recent changes,
and current trends in the securities industry. Topics include:
Roles of investment bankers, stock exchange members, specialists and market makers •
Introduction to all products and services of the securities industry •
Regulatory roles of U.S. Federal law •
Role of the NASD •
Self-regulatory organizations •
Who Should Attend: Newcomers to the securities industry, traders, salespeople, back-
office professionals, staff assistants, compliance staff, auditors and IT professionals.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets, Finance Essentials for the
Professional, Compliance for the Securities Industries, Introducing Wall Street
Global Economic Analysis ■ D
Dates May 5–7
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRCN2027
Instructor Jorge Martinez Gonzalez
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In recent years, there has been a change in the way world economic affairs are settled.
While developed nations in the economic and commercial axis of U.S.-Europe-Japan
held the leadership throughout the 20
th
Century, now the 30 strongest emerging
markets are setting the pace. The repercussions this will have on the economic policy
of countries, the global industrial organization, and day-to-day decisions and strategy
at the firm level, needs to be studied from innovative angles. This course offers the
framework required to carry out a global economic analysis using a novel technique
known as global gameboards. This allows the participant to map his country/industry/
firm as if playing a complex game arranged in three consecutive game boards.
Who Should Attend: Planning and finance executives, chief economists, policy makers,
consultants, portfolio managers and risk managers, corporate treasurers, comptrollers,
and any executive or academic interested in discussing the brave new appearance of
the global arena.
Prerequisites: A course in basic macroeconomics.
Follow-Up Courses: Investing in Emerging Markets, Global Trader, Hedge Funds,
Economic Indicators: Clues to the Future
Initial Public Offerings ■ DN
Dates TBD
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 a.m. – 4:30 p.m.
Level Intermediate
Code CRPF3007
Instructor William Jannace
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Gain a detailed knowledge of initial public offerings, securities regulation requirements,
underwriting and trading. Will explore the history of market fads, valuation for original
pricing, aftermarket valuation, the prospectus and investment strategies.
Who Should Attend: Entry/mid level B/D compliance person
Prerequisites: None
Core Finance Concepts
28 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
International Capital Markets ■ DC
Dates April 14–17
M
Sessions 4 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRED2059
Instructor Irene Campbell
Cost $3,975
CPE Credits 28.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This thorough and interactive course offers delegates a detailed grounding in the
full range of capital market instruments. Attendees leave the class with a clear
understanding of key drivers, players, and features in the markets today, enhancing the
opportunity for success in this increasingly complex area. Topics include:
Key players in the international capital markets •
Regulatory framework •
Money market instruments: CDs, CPs, loans and deposits •
Debt and equity capital markets •
FX instruments •
Derivative instruments—forwards and futures, swaps, options •
Structured finance •
Risk management—credit derivatives, credit risk, Basel II •
Who Should Attend: Risk managers, corporate treasurers, fund managers, compliance
staff, capital market trainees, private bankers, investment advisors, portfolio managers,
accountants, regulators.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Managerial Finance ■ D
Dates March 13–14
M
, June 26–27
D
,
September 18–19
M
,
November 13–14
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRCN3004
Instructor Marc Cherney
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This class explores how to analyze internally prepared financial information and how to
use it as a basis for making sound business decisions. Beginning with an overview of
the key differences between external and internal financial reporting, the course quickly
progresses to more complex models and tools. Topics include:
Managerial • vs. financial accounting
Cost-volume-profit analysis •
Operating leverage •
Sales and product mix analysis •
Special pricing decisions •
Evaluating divisions and product lines •
Managing usage of limited resources •
Target costing and pricing •
Make • vs. buy decisions and outsourcing
Measuring financial performance •
Balanced scorecard •
Controllable cost analysis •
Transfer pricing •
Return on investment measures •
Cost estimation methods •
Common methods used by •
companies to estimate and allocate
costs to products, services, and
departments
Activity-based costing •
Profitable growth through •
acquisition
Who Should Attend: Managers, analysts, consultants, project leaders, accountants,
auditors, and others who seek a broad, yet comprehensive, understanding of
managerial financial tools and analytical methods used by successful operating
managers to make better business decisions.
Prerequisites: A fundamental understanding of GAAP accounting principles, concepts,
and terminology, as well as a general understanding of effective business management
principles and practices.
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Corporate Finance, Advanced Accounting Topics
Core Finance Concepts
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 29
Overview of Asian Capital Markets ■ n
Dates June 2
M
, October 16
M
Sessions 4 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1044
Instructor Manan Rawal
Cost $1,575
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
With above average growth rates and a significant consumer base that is fueling
economic expansion, the countries of Asia are seeing unprecedented developments in
their financial landscapes. They are providing investors and issuers a great opportunity
to take advantage of high-capital returns. However, given the relative infancy of many
of the local financial markets, there are still risks in Asia for a new investor to consider.
This course mines through the landscapes of the major players in Singapore, Hong
Kong, Sydney, Shanghai, and Mumbai with an eye toward understanding what type of
financial instruments are being used by both domestic and international players to take
advantage of the Asian growth story. Topics include:
Asian macroeconomic trends •
Asian financial markets – •
historical perspective and today
Cash and derivative instrument coverage •
Liquidity constraints •
Use of derivatives and the role of hedge funds •
Who Should Attend: All finance professionals.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: International Capital Markets, Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets,
Introduction to Wall Street
Overview of Trade Finance Concepts ■ n
Dates April 3
M
Sessions 2 Evenings
Duration 5:30 pm–8:00 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1042
Instructor James McDonnell
Cost $850
CPE Credits 3.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides a comprehensive overview of various trade finance concepts and
products. Participants evaluate the risks contained in international trade finance and
discuss the products employed to mitigate those risks, such as documentary collections,
various types and applications of letters of credit, and bankers’ acceptances. Topics
include:
Risks and opportunities of trade finance •
from the perspective of importer and
exporter
UCP 500 •
Collections •
Trade letters of credit—roles of the bank •
Single bank and multi-bank L/Cs •
Role of the bank in advising and •
confirming L/Cs
Non-trade or performance letters of •
credit as a form of credit enhancement
Bankers’ acceptances—who issues •
them and who invests in them
Bankers’ acceptances as investments •
Who Should Attend: Anyone required to understand trade finance products.
Prerequisites: A basic understanding of credit risk.
Follow-Up Courses: International Capital Markets
Practical Applications of Sarbanes-Oxley ■ D
Dates April 23
M
, August 20
D
,
November 13
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN3003
Instructor William Reed
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this one-day workshop, participants examine how to use templates to gather and
present financial information and processes to comply with the various sections
of Sarbanes-Oxley. Starting with a basic overview of the legislation, this workshop
progresses to reviewing templates to help in collecting financial information and testing
of internal controls and processes. The workshop also reviews the human capital
component of Sarbanes-Oxley dealing with the complaint process, whistleblower
protection, code of ethics, and roles and responsibilities within the organization. Hands-
on activities, case studies, and group discussions are part of the learning format. Topics
include:
Reasons for the Sarbanes-Oxley Act •
COSO internal controls framework •
Instruments for the proper •
documentation of internal controls
How reporting and testing can help in •
detecting internal control issues
Roles and responsibilities in the •
internal control environment
Complaint processes and whistle •
blower protection
Importance of a code of ethics •
Who Should Attend: CEOs, CFOs, controllers or managers of accounting operations, IT
or HR professionals, accounting or auditing professionals, advisors to the board or audit
committee or otherwise associated with publicly held entities, officers or trustees of a
non-profit entity, venture capital financial advisors.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Anti-Money Laundering, Financial Statement Analysis
Core Finance Concepts
30 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Probability and Statistics for the Finance Professional ■ nC
Dates May 7
M
Sessions 8 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1021
Instructor Adam Shrager
Cost $1,975
CPE Credits 20.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Finance professionals tend to take coursework in technical analysis, fundamental
analysis, and portfolio theory. However, the underlying principle in all of these
disciplines is a solid understanding of probability and statistics. This class is specifically
relevant to the finance community. Topics Include:
Beta, delta, normal distributions, and standard deviation •
Hedging and modeling •
Concepts in probability and portfolio management •
Who Should Attend: Traders, analysts, brokers, insurance professionals, and any
other finance professional who wants to be more knowledgeable about the underlying
numbers that they deal with every day.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Reading the ■ Financial Times D
Dates April 11
M
, July 8
M
Sessions 2 hours
Duration 9:00 am–11:00 am
Level Introductory
Code CRCN 1045
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $675
CPE Credits 2.0
Instructor Group–Live
Method
We are in the age of ever-growing information. While textbooks form the bedrock of
your studies and coursework provides focused learning, daily updates are essential to
understanding subjects ranging from economics to IT. The forces of globalization have
forced companies and individuals to change their thinking. Understanding the U.S. in
isolation is no longer enough. Instead, you need information that allows you to form
a coherent understanding of the most important issues in business, economics, and
politics worldwide.
Think of the Financial Times as a daily fusion of knowledge. Alan Greenspan, former
Federal Reserve chairman, and Warren Buffet, the world’s most successful investor, both
use the Financial Times daily. The FT.com website, companion to the daily hardcopy
of the Financial Times, offers not only the archive of the FT site but also 3,000 other
publications which are easy to navigate when searching specific geographic or political
trends that interest you. The Financial Times has unique access to business and political
leaders worldwide and an unmatched corps of correspondents who write with accuracy
and flair for the U.S. reader.
Who Should Attend: Beneficial to analysts, associates, brokers, bankers, operations
and IT Professionals, traders who have spent some time in a position in the financial
service industry or knowledge of the financial services industry.
Prerequisites: Basic understanding of capital markets.
Statistical Concepts for the Marketplace ■ nC
Dates January 30
M
, September 16
D
Sessions 4 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRCN1041
Instructor Adam Shrager
Cost $1,575
CPE Credits 10.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Trends, whether in weather, finance, or gambling, hinge on the concept of probability.
The study of probability and statistics sends shivers of dread through most people.
Often probability is thought of as only having practical applications in the gambling
arena. In fact, probability and statistics have scores of applications throughout finance.
The entire philosophy of technical analysis is predicated on forecasting future price
trends. Fundamental analysis believes that financial statements may be a window into
a company’s future health, and the pricing of options and derivative products all hinge
on some notion of a future price. Arbitrage falls under two categories. Statistical and
deterministic—both of which hinge on mathematical models involving statistics. In
short, although one can effectively and profitably recognize patterns on a chart or plug
values into proprietary pricing software—to fully understand, appreciate, criticize, and
improve such analysis, one must understand the foundation of how the models are
created. Therefore, one must understand notions of probability and statistical modeling.
This four-session class covers the essentials of statistical thought, including detailed
examples drawn from the financial marketplace. The emphasis is on the practical and
the applied, and not on the theory.
Who Should Attend: Traders, analysts, brokers, insurance professionals, and other
finance professionals.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Core Finance Concepts
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 31
Strategic Financial Analysis ■ D
Dates June 12–13
M
, December 4–5
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRCN2028
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This two-day course focuses on the strategies that businesses and corporations employ
in their quest to create value for their shareholders. Participants are introduced to
strategies firms use to carry out financial analysis and planning, investments analysis,
capital structure, and dividend policy. The role of hedging in strategic financial analysis
is also examined. Through hands-on exercises and discussions, participants acquire an
understanding of the importance of strategic financial analysis. Topics include:
Components of a firm’s strategic financial analysis framework •
Interdependencies of corporate financial decision making •
Roles of the chief financial officer and other officers in firms •
Who Should Attend: Anyone who wishes to transition into corporate financial
management.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of the Securities Industry or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Financial Statement Analysis, Credit Risk Analysis, Introduction to
Financial Engineering
Tax Concepts for Finance ■ D
Dates February 11–12
D
, May 6–7
D
,
October 27–28
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code AATX1004
Instructor Paul Kushel
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This two-day course is designed to give those in finance functions a working knowledge
of tax law and an appreciation for the impact it has on finance decisions. By developing
tax literacy and awareness, participants achieve a better understanding and recognition
of tax issues, aiding in their ability to converse with clients, colleagues, and tax
professionals about tax-related matters. The course provides an understanding of how
tax considerations alter the structuring of business transactions.
The course does not require specific prior knowledge and uses a lecture format with
numerous examples to reinforce the concepts. A wide spectrum of taxation topics is
explored, including:
Business entities •
Tax aspects of mergers and acquisitions •
Property transactions •
International tax considerations •
Who Should Attend: Investment bankers, commercial bankers, relationship managers,
and anyone working in a finance function.
Prerequisites: None
32 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Corporate Finance: Today’s corporate finance field has active participants from
investment banking, commercial banking, entrepreneurs in venture capital, and government agencies.
New York Institute of Finance’s wide range of courses is also suitable for individuals who require a deeper
knowledge to help make more effective financing decisions. The courses define and explain the fundamental
concepts and terminology of corporate finance, including the concepts of value and different valuation
techniques. Courses examine corporate financial structuring, the cost of capital, and optimal capital structure.
The methods of raising capital whether by mergers, acquisitions, and venture capital are also explored.
Advanced Corporate Finance ■ D
Dates October 20–24
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code CRPF5000
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides a detailed analysis of maximizing a firm’s value within the context
of market constraints that include risk and regulations. This analysis involves the study
of the optimal use of corporate assets and liabilities. Some of this study can be done
with concrete financial formulas. However, some require the use of other disciplines,
such as behavioral science, and using of judgment and savvy. The class builds upon the
excellent financial base of Fundamentals of Corporate Finance (7
th
Edition) by S. Ross,
R. Westerfield, and B. Jordan (McGraw Hill), and fills in the missing parts that one needs
to make a corporate financial decision. Emphasis is on the application of fundamental
problem-solving procedures to practical business situations. Analysis also covers special
challenges from international investing and derivatives, namely the use of option
strategies in corporate finance. Topics include:
Determining the value of a firm within an efficient market •
Raising capital and its optimal uses •
Evaluating various growth strategies •
Who Should Attend: Analysts, associates, senior level bankers, asset managers,
portfolio managers, M&A specialists, and corporate bankers. Anyone working in the
international arena or on the Level II and III CFA
®
exam would also benefit.
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of time value calculations, accounting, finance,
economics, and some basic topics in derivatives and statistics.
Core Skills Analyst Program – ■
Corporate Finance & Valuation Fundamentals DBC
Dates April 14–18
M
,
August 18–22
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRPF1018
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Corporate Finance & Valuation Fundamentals focuses on the primary tasks of the
corporate treasurer or financial analyst. The program covers the key principles of
corporate finance including project analysis and capital budgeting, the time value of
money, and various valuation concepts. Plus, participants are challenged to decide
a firm’s optimal capital structure. The basics of discounted cash flow shows how to
estimate a weighted average cost of capital to use as a discount rate appropriate to
a particular company or project. Alternative valuation techniques are also examined.
Topics include:
Time value of money •
Project analysis and capital budgeting •
Discounted cash flow basics •
Financial statement basics •
Private and public comparables •
Economic value added •
Financing alternatives •
Mergers and acquisitions •
Separation techniques •
Valuation concepts including terminal •
value, enterprise and equity value, risk/
return, the cost of debt and equity, the
weighted average cost of capital, and
capital structure
By the end of the module, participants have all the tools necessary to understand the
financing, investing, dividend, and valuation decisions corporations make each day.
Who Should Attend: Entry-level professionals, investment professionals, research
analysts, corporate bankers, fixed income analysts, credit analysts, equity analysts,
mergers & acquisitions professionals, and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: Undergraduate degree or equivalent, fluency in English, proficiency in
basic Excel™, word processing skills. Financial calculator required.
Corporate Finance
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 33
Corporate Finance & Financial Management ■ D
Solutions for Wealth Advisors
Dates July 29–30
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code SPEC1002
Instructor Patricia Sparacio
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course prepares participants with the tools needed to have comfortable and
confident business-focused discussions with business owner clients by learning the
basics of a company’s operations, finance, and management decisions. Participants
learn to identify opportunities based on an analysis of a company’s business using
actual financial information. Case studies help them better understand and implement a
client’s strategic goals, financial situation, issues, and concerns. Regional variances are
discussed. Topics include:
Cash conversion cycle •
Risks and mitigants •
Business risk • vs. financial risk
Linking the investment, finance and •
dividend decision
Business, operations, and industry analysis •
Working capital and working investment •
analysis
Project analysis and capital budgeting •
Cash flow analysis •
Management issues •
Financial forecasting •
Discounted cash flow •
Cost of capital and capital structure •
Financing alternatives •
Relative valuation techniques •
M&A separation techniques: Spin-offs, •
SPVs, carve outs
Hedging raw materials, interest rate risk •
Foreign exchange •
Off-balance sheet items – guarantees, •
LIs, SBLCs, PLCs, SPVs, operating leases
Cash and treasury management •
Who Should Attend: Private bankers, wealth advisors, brokers, portfolio managers,
finance professionals.
Prerequisites: Wealth Management Program or equivalent knowledge, basic
knowledge of accounting concepts.
Follow-Up Courses: Essentials of Corporate Finance
Essentials of Corporate Finance ■ DC
Dates April 23–25
M
, August 26–28
S

October 13–15
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRPF1014
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Corporate Finance underlies all financial decisions a firm makes, forming the foundation
for everything from credit analysis to mergers and acquisitions activity. Using theory and
practical applications, this course provides a foundation in key concepts underlying the
analysis and execution of financial decisions and demonstrates how financing decisions
impact a firm’s value. Newer techniques in corporate finance, including behavioral and
option pricing models, are also explored. Case studies are used to analyze targeted firms
from the current market in order to compare and determine valuations and to discuss
corporate finance strategies. Topics include:
Objectives of the firm and its chief executive officer •
Valuation techniques to determine intrinsic values •
Capital budgeting frameworks •
Analysis of financing options when making financial decisions •
Overview of corporate finance techniques •
Who Should Attend: Individuals in credit, investment banking, corporate finance, and
sales and trading.
Prerequisites: Introduction to Financial Accounting, Financial Statement Analysis, or
equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator required.
Corporate Finance
34 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Financial Modeling for Corporate Finance ■ nB
Dates January 28–March 10
M
,
June 2–July 7
M
Sessions 6 Evenings
Duration 6:00 pm–8:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code FIMD3004
Instructor NYIF Instructor
Cost $1,775
CPE Credits 15.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Starting with basic modeling functions, this course progresses through complex
modeling skills, including lookups, indexing, and valuation approaches. In addition
to discussing the mechanics of how to build a model, it also covers techniques
and calculations specific to corporate finance and valuing assets as well as accrual
accounting valuations. Best practices of both design and implementation are covered.
Topics include:
Discounted cash flow models (DCF) •
Net present value (NPV) •
Weighted average costs of capital (WACC) •
Projecting financial statements for M&A •
Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) •
Valuation using multiples •
Accretion/dilution •
Who Should Attend: Business managers, financial managers, investors, corporate
finance analysts, and board members.
Prerequisites: A solid knowledge of financial statements and the basics of corporate
finance, such as TVM, cash flows, and discounting. A thorough knowledge of Excel™.
Follow-Up Courses: Mergers & Acquisitions: Structuring the Deal, Mergers &
Acquisitions: Concepts and Theories
Initial Public Offerings ■ DN
Dates TBD
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 a.m. – 4:30 p.m.
Level Intermediate
Code CRPF3007
Instructor William Jannace
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Gain a detailed knowledge of initial public offerings, securities regulation requirements,
underwriting and trading. Will explore the history of market fads, valuation for original
pricing, aftermarket valuation, the prospectus and investment strategies.
Who Should Attend: Entry/mid level B/D compliance person
Prerequisites: None
International Corporate Finance ■ DB
Dates May 5–9
M
, October 20–24
D
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code CRPF5001
Instructor William Henry
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides an overview of the global financial environment, presents the
BOP accounts, imparts a serious discussion of foreign exchange-rate determination
and markets. It heavily emphasizes both foreign exchange-rate risk management and
corporate strategy for foreign direct investment. Additionally, the course presents an
extensive (case study) discussion of the international capital budgeting decision process
as it pertains to the special risks associated with international investing such as political
and sovereign risk, inflation risk and much more. Cash versus equity purchases are
analyzed. The perspective of international mergers and acquisitions is also explored.
Who Should Attend: Executives whose work-related activities fall within the domain
of the subject matter of this course—corporate finance, international, and monetary
economics.
Prerequisites: A basic knowledge of accounting, economics, and finance and a
sufficient quantitative background in calculus (derivation and integration) and statistics.
An advantage would be knowledge of monetary (to include international) economics.
Basic knowledge of corporate finance is required.
Corporate Finance
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 35
Introduction to Financial Engineering ■ D
Dates November 10–12
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRPF1019
Instructor Jorge Martinez Gonzalez
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The current globalization trends in all financial markets call for customized answers
for each type of client. Financial Engineering is a newly created discipline among both
practitioners and academics that tackles that requirement. Using as building blocks
the tools of risk management, derivatives, product structuring, statistics and financial
institutions, this course develops a framework for designing and implementing tailor-
made instruments and solutions through an exciting creative process. Topics include:
Basic theories behind modern finance •
Building blocks of financial instrument design •
Skills for building and judging if buying, or criticizing if selling, a tailor-made financial •
instrument
Who Should Attend: Risk managers, corporate treasurers, fund managers, sell side
analysts and vendors, financial advisors, capital and fixed income markets specialists,
and risk auditors.
Prerequisites: A solid knowledge of basic financial theories. Fixed Income Suite,
Overview of Capital Markets and Fundamentals of Derivatives, or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Default Swaps: From Vanilla to Exotic, Derivatives Suite, Risk
Management of Derivatives
Know Your Client (KYC) ■ D
Dates July 28
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC1001
Instructor Patricia Sparacio
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students learn how to understand the total wealth picture of clients and how to use this
information to:
ascertain investment appropriateness •
verify that clients meet the firm’s standards and can cause no harm to the firm’s •
reputation
This introductory course provides participants with a basic understanding of information
as presented in financial statements. Students learn key financial concepts and how to
use balance sheets and income and cash flow statements received from their clients or
prospects to make decisions. Participants also learn how to ask key questions to solicit
information necessary to complete KYC requirements, especially from non-U.S. clients
where reporting is not as regulated as in the U.S. The program integrates two client
cases in small team exercises that allow participants to practice their skills in real-life
scenarios. Topics include:
Understanding forms of business and financial reporting •
Interpreting key financial statements •
The balance sheet and income statement •
The cash conversion cycle •
Using financial statements •
Who Should Attend: KYC officers, wealth management advisors, brokers, finance
professionals, private bankers new to the field.
Prerequisites: Wealth Management Program or equivalent experience.
Follow-Up Courses: Financial Statement Analysis, Demystifying Cash Flow, Anti-Money
Laundering
36 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Credit Risk: Credit analysis is never out of style. With increased regulatory requirements,
and volatile markets, now more than ever, understanding credit risk is important for everyone in every
business sector. These course offerings address important aspects of credit analysis and provide a
comprehensive coverage of the field.
Advanced Credit Risk Analysis ■ DC
Dates March 17–19
S
,
September 16–18
S
,
December 3–5
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code CRED3001
Instructor Henry Pullman
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Using real-life case studies and practical exercises, this course focuses on how to
improve balance sheet management; compare and contrast investment-grade issuers vs.
high-yield issuers; understand the importance of valuation in credit analysis, examine
the current state of the market and use quantitative market tools. Topics include:
Industry and corporate strategy •
Credit cycle •
Market trends •
Evaluating the borrower •
Definitions of default •
Evaluation of the issue •
Management •
Early warning signs •
Valuation and structuring •
Who Should Attend: Financial analysts, portfolio managers, credit officers, commercial
bankers, loan and lending professionals, and credit risk managers.
Prerequisites: Credit Risk Analysis or at least five years of credit experience. Financial
calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Basel II Credit Risk, Corporate Failure: Early Warning Signs,
Demystifying Cash Flow, Transparency in Financial Statements
Analysis of Financial Institutions ■ DC
Dates March 13–14
M
,
September 22–23
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRED2045
Instructor Henry Pullman
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Analyzing a financial institution is very different from analyzing a corporate entity. When
a financial institution has liquidity problems, the downfall can be fast and furious. Topics
include:
Overview of industry-specific risks including market, credit and operational •
Analysis of a bank’s balance sheet and income statement •
Utilization of CAMEL analytical approach •
Identification of warning signs of potential problems •
Legal and regulatory environment •
Who Should Attend: Bank and country analysts, correspondent bankers, central
bankers and export credit agency officers.
Prerequisites: Credit Risk Analysis or equivalent experience/knowledge. Financial
calculator required.
Basel II Credit Risk ■ DC
Dates March 3–5
M
,
October 29–31
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRED2055
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Basel II is a requirement for many banks. This course provides a comprehensive study of
the credit, market, and operational risk requirements.
Topics include:
Background for and context of the Basel II credit risk requirements •
Data requirements for the key calculations for all approaches and for all main exposure •
types
Execution of basic calculations for both Standardized and IRB approaches •
Issues surrounding Pillar 2 and Pillar 3 compliance •
Who Should Attend: Credit and risk officers, business analysts working in Basel II,
compliance officers, finance and technology officers.
Prerequisites: Solid general knowledge of banking products, preferably to include on-
and off-balance sheet products and derivatives. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Measuring and Managing Operational Risk
Credit Risk
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 37
Core Skills Analyst Program – Credit Risk Analysis ■ DBC
Dates April 7–11
M
, August 11–15
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRED2058
Instructors Henry Pullman, Patricia Sparacio &
NYIF Instructor
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Credit Risk Analysis is never out of style. No matter which industry or department one
may work in, a solid grounding in credit risk fundamentals is required. This program
provides the tools and techniques required to perform a credit analysis. The focus is on
understanding the qualitative issues before performing the quantitative analysis. After
an historical risk analysis is carried out, participants perform financial forecasting, which
determines correct structuring. The class also explores financing alternatives including
options in money and capital markets, seniority, protection and monitoring, holding
company analysis, subordination, covenants, and off-balance sheet items. Practice is
key, so there is ample opportunity to practice the analytical techniques learned in each
section. Topics include:
Credit, market and operational risk •
The 5 Ps and 5 Cs of credit •
Sources of information •
Qualitative framework for analysis •
including business and industry
Cash conversion cycle •
Risks and mitigants •
Management considerations •
Regulatory and environmental issues •
Ratios and credit statistics •
Off-balance sheet considerations •
Cash flow analysis •
Forecasting and key value drivers •
Structuring and documentation •
Credit ratings •
Credit derivatives •
By the end of the module students acquire the skills necessary to complete a credit risk
analysis. In addition, they have the chance to present the analysis of a case study and
receive feedback from faculty.
Who Should Attend: Entry-level professionals, investment professionals, research
analysts, corporate bankers, fixed income analysts, credit analysts, equity analysts,
mergers and acquisitions professionals, and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: Undergraduate degree or equivalent, fluency in English, proficiency in
basic Excel™, word processing skills. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Credit Risk Analysis, Corporate Failure Early Warning Signs
Corporate Failure – Early Warning Signs ■ D
Dates March 10–11
M
,
November 6–7
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRED2028
Instructor Henry Pullman
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
While credit defaults have been at historically low levels, corporate failures, due to
uncertainties in the economy and financial markets, appear to be increasing. Using the
latest market tools available to effectively monitor performance, participants will learn
how to proactively identify companies that may be experiencing financial problems.
Topics include:
Current state of the market •
Volatility and managing the risk •
Finding causes of decline through risk •
evaluation
Warning signs in financial statements •
and financial statement footnotes
Creative accounting •
Identification of deteriorating factors •
through risk evaluation
Who Should Attend: Credit and financial analysts, credit officers, credit managers, and
investment managers.
Prerequisites: Credit Risk Analysis or equivalent experience/knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Credit Risk Analysis, Basel II Credit Risk
Credit Risk
38 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Corporate Credit Risk Judgment ■ DN
Dates February 25–28
M
, June 16–19
D
Sessions 4 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRED2064
Instructor Jack Foster
Cost $3,975
CPE Credit 28.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Corporate Credit Risk Judgment Course is a four-day course on corporate credit risk
assessment and application. The course develops a framework and methodology for
evaluating credit risk using current annual reports and industry information rather than
artificial cases. This framework and methodology leads to participant evaluation of credit
ratings that are expressed in terms of a percent likelihood of default (company or issuer
ratings) and adjusted default ratings that adjust for a percent likelihood of loss given
default (facility or issue ratings). The default rating methodology includes risk rating
assessment of business risk (industry risk, competitive position, management) as well
as financial risk (financial policy, profitability, leverage, cash flow and financial flexibility)
as well as techniques for integrating these factors to come up with an overall default
rating. The loss rating methodology includes methods for evaluating recovery based on
enterprise and liquidation values as well as on adjustments for collateral, covenants,
and structural and contractual seniority and subordination. More importantly, while the
training includes credit risk analysis, the primary focus is on credit risk judgment. The
course uses mock rating committees and group presentations as an aid to developing
a working knowledge rather just a familiarity with the subject. The course includes both
investment grade and non-investment grade cases. The course includes pre-course
reading materials, course handout materials, and post-course methodologies for
updating the material covered in the course.
Who Should Attend: Credit officers, credit administrators, lending officers and bond
investors.
Prerequisites: No previous credit experience is required.
Follow-Up Courses: Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and Management, Hedge Fund
Credit Risk Judgment & Management
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate ■ DnBC
Dates January 16–17
S
,
February 20–21
D
, May 7–8
S
July 24–25
M
, August 21–22
S

August 26–27
M
,
November 3–4
M
,
December 9–10
S
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV2008
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates January 28
M
, April 28
D
,
September 8
M
Sessions 6 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRED2053
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $1,775
CPE Credits 15.0
Level Intermediate
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Credit has always been the most intractable of the financial risks to manage. The
application of derivatives risk management technology to credit risk has resulted
in making credit derivatives a rapidly growing market segment with a high rate of
innovation. Topics include:
Mechanics of the “standard” credit derivative transaction •
Most common variations of structured credit products •
Mechanics of pricing and hedging •
Who Should Attend: Treasury managers, credit analysts, financial analysts, traders.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Derivatives, Derivative Products I and/or II or
equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives, Risk Management of Derivatives,
Risk Management Suite
Credit Risk
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 39
Credit Portfolio Risk Management ■ D
Dates June 25–27
M
, December 3–5
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate / Advanced
Code CRED2037
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This advanced course focuses on credit portfolio risk management techniques,
examining several of the models and approaches developed in the marketplace. It
considers how credit derivatives and other risk mitigation methods are used in the
implementation of a credit portfolio risk management program. There is a discussion of
the relationship of credit risk to other risks faced by financial institutions—market risk,
operational risk, liquidity, and other risks.
The course examines these risks and the associated management tools and techniques
within the broader context of the Value at Risk (VaR) approach to integrated risk
management. VaR is important because it has the support of the banking regulators as
an acceptable basis for the development of internal models of risk analysis, the return
on capital, and capital adequacy. Finally, the course addresses the policy, practice,
and process issues needed as part of an integrated risk management program within a
financial institution.
Who Should Attend: Credit portfolio managers, credit managers, risk managers, risk
controllers, credit risk modelers, investment managers, asset managers, portfolio
managers, quantitative analysts, IT professionals, regulators.
Prerequisites: A basic understanding of statistics and credit.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Derivatives, Advanced Credit Risk Analysis
Credit Risk Analysis ■ DC
Dates February 4–8
M
,
February 25–29
S

May 5–9
M
, August 4–8
S
,
October 27–31
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRED2013
Instructor Henry Pullman
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students learn the principal concepts of credit risk analysis techniques using a
structured approach and explore the management of credit risks under competitive and
realistic conditions. Topics include:
Evaluating industry and business risk performance •
Rating agencies •
Financial statement analysis and forecasting •
Loan structuring and the asset conversion cycle •
Cash flow dynamics and the business cycle •
Loan failure prediction using market tools •
Who Should Attend: Credit and financial analysts, portfolio managers, credit officers,
commercial bankers, risk managers and analysts.
Prerequisites: Financial Statement Analysis or equivalent knowledge. Working
knowledge of Excel™. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Credit Risk Analysis, Demystifying Cash Flow,
Transparency in Financial Statements, Basel II Credit Risk
Credit Risk Analysis for Private Bankers ■ DC
Dates February 11–12
M
, June 12–13
M
October 13–14
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRED2038
Instructor Henry Pullman
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Wealth advisors, including private bankers, are increasingly being asked to extend credit
to their clients. Requests range from a home loan to leveraging a hedge fund. This two-
day course provides private bankers with the concepts and tools to better evaluate risk.
Topics include:
Lending to operating companies •
Lending against real estate •
Analyzing personal financial statements •
Identifying the true borrower •
Lending against marketable securities •
Loan purpose •
Credit products and uses •
Lending against hedge funds •
Know Your Client and the true source of •
cash flow
Who Should Attend: Private bankers and other wealth advisors wishing to identify
additional opportunities for lucrative business while maintaining a strong sense of risk.
Prerequisites: Introduction to Financial Accounting or equivalent knowledge. Financial
calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Risk Analysis, Basel II Credit Risk, Hedge Funds, Introduction
to Alternative Investments, Mutual Funds
Credit Risk
40 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives ■ D
Dates March 10–11
M
,
September 8–9
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV2053
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In recent years, over-the-counter swaps and options have developed from a new product
into a standard risk management tool. Yet despite derivatives’ commonplace nature,
establishing an effective risk management process remains a challenging undertaking.
Hands-on spreadsheets with a simplified mathematical framework are provided to
illustrate the general theory for evaluating the risk of over-the-counter derivative
transactions. The focus is on practical implementation issues for establishing an
effective risk management process.
Who Should Attend: Brokers, traders, treasury managers, credit and financial analysts.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Derivatives, Derivative Products I and/or II or
equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Derivatives, Risk Management Suite
Credit Structuring ■ D
Dates March 27
M
, November 3
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRED2060
Instructor James McDonnell
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this course participants learn the skills, tools, and techniques for arriving at an
appropriate credit structure when analyzing a client’s loan request. Topics include:
Sizing up the deal – financial analysis •
and projected cash flows
Lending to the correct entity •
Corporate guarantees •
Subordinations – second liens •
Matching facilities to purpose •
Credit agreements and covenants •
Who Should Attend: Credit professionals, risk professionals, analysts and associate
bankers.
Prerequisites: A financial institution credit training program, Core Skills Analyst
Program - Credit Risk Analysis or equivalent knowledge.
Demystifying Cash Flow ■ DC
Dates February 25
D
, June 2
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / intermediate
Code CRED1007
Instructor Laura Berman
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this course, the focus is on the three components of the cash flow statement:
operating, investing, and financing. Hands-on case studies help evaluate and quantify
cash flow issues. Participants discover how they can help provide a better understanding
of a company’s business and financial risks and how the information can be used to
demystify the numbers. Topics include:
How cash flow analysis unlocks critical information for corporate credit analysis •
Methodology for building a cash flow statement from a company’s balance sheet, •
income statement, and footnotes
How to analyze a corporate cash flow statement using a sources and uses statement •
and account reconciliations
Who Should Attend: Any finance professional wishing to learn more about cash flow
analysis.
Prerequisites: Introduction to Financial Accounting or equivalent knowledge, and
general familiarity with corporate financial statements. Financial calculator required.
Credit Risk
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 41
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and Management ■ DN
Dates March 12–14
M
, April 8–10
S
,
August 25–27
D
,
October 14–16
S
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV 2060
Instructor Jack Foster
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and Management course offers an overview of how
to analyze cash flows for a single transaction, aggregate cash flows for all derivative
products, ascertain peak credit exposures, determine accurate derivative credit costs,
contrast derivative trading with derivative credit risk, and achieve consensus among
traders and credit officers as they develop policies and systems to govern derivative
transactions.
The concepts and techniques offered in this course is useful not only for identifying
derivative credit risk within a counterparty’s overall credit risk, but also for refining credit
policies. The course outlines steps for gradually implementing increasingly sophisticated
techniques for measuring, costing, and managing derivative exposure.
Who Should Attend: Credit officers, credit administrators and derivative sales
personnel, and traders.
Prerequisites: No previous derivative experience is required.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Portfolio Risk Management, Hedge Fund Credit Risk
Judgment and Management, Credit Default Swaps: From Vanilla to Exotic
Financial Analysis of Insurance Companies ■ DC
Dates March 17–18
M
,
September 22–23
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRED3002
Instructor Marc Cherney
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Analyzing insurance companies is very different from analyzing corporations and
thus presents unique challenges and industry-specific issues. In this fast-paced two-
day course, participants learn the financial analytical techniques to assess financial
strength and operating performance of property & casualty and life & health insurance
companies domiciled in the United States.
Beginning with an overview of Statutory and GAAP accounting for insurance companies,
the course quickly progresses to more complex accounting and reporting issues, such
as reinsurance, reserving practices, investment valuation and impairment. This course
provides an excellent foundation for understanding and analyzing statutory statements
and ratios, markets and regulatory issues, valuation issues, risks, reserve concepts,
rating agency assessments, early warning signs, management issues and current
trends in the industry. The course format includes a combination of group discussions,
short examples and case problems to illustrate and apply the concepts of insurance
accounting and financial analysis. Topics include:
Statutory accounting •
GAAP accounting •
Major SAP to GAAP differences •
Impact of reinsurance •
Rating agency financial measures •
Capital adequacy analysis •
Operations analysis •
Financial forecasting •
Potential impacts of IFRS •
Who Should Attend: Banking, insurance and credit risk professionals, analysts,
associates and auditors.
Prerequisites: A basic understanding of accounting and insurance products.
Financial calculator required.
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and Management ■ DN
Dates March 4
S
, May 5
D
, July 8
S
,

September 8
M
, November 5
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE 2035
Instructor Jack Foster
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and Management course offers an effective
framework for analyzing the risk of any generic or non-generic hedge fund. Participants
will develop long-term perspectives on hedge fund credit risk across different hedge
fund profit strategies and different hedge fund facilities.
Participants will maximize their understanding of hedge fund lending and trading
opportunities within prudent credit practices. The techniques and concepts presented
in this course will be useful in developing a plan for hedge fund credit exposure
measurement and costing policies compatible with the culture of any particular financial
organization.
Who Should Attend: Anyone who audits, reviews, monitors or extends hedge fund credit.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Introduction to Alternative Investments, Derivative Credit Risk
Judgment and Management
Credit Risk
42 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Introduction to Credit Derivatives ■ DC
Dates January 15
S
, February 12
M
,
May 6
S
, May 13
M
, August 20
S
,
September 18
M
, December 8
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code DERV 1023
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladaro
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day course assumes that participants have no or minimal knowledge of credit
derivatives. The instruction is interactive and will involve exercises and articles about
recent developments in credit derivatives. Participants will work individually and in
teams.
Who Should Attend: Treasury managers, credit analysts, financial analysts, traders,
operations personnel, auditors, compliance officers, lawyers and regulators.
Prerequisites: Knowledge of derivative contracts. Financial calculator required.
Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis ■ DC
Dates January 14
S
, February 11
M
,
April 14
S
, April 28
M
,
June 16
S
, November 3
D
,
December 8
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code CRED1006
Instructor Laura Berman
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Credit risk analysis is never out of style. Whatever the industry or department in which
one works, a solid grounding in credit risk fundamentals is required. This course,
enhanced by a hands-on case study, provides a framework for credit analysis. Topics
include:
Market trends •
Business and industry analysis •
Ratios and financial statement analysis •
Cash flow analysis •
Role of ratings agencies •
Management issues •
Who Should Attend: Individuals who need to be familiar with credit basics and the
associated language, but who do not necessarily work in a credit or finance function.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Risk Analysis, Advanced Credit Risk Analysis, Demystifying
Cash Flow, Transparency in Financial Statements, Basel II Credit Risk
Measuring & Managing Operational Risk: Basel II Compliance ■ DB
Dates June 11–13
M
, October 20–22
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code RISK3000
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Analysis and reduction of operational risk in financial institutions has often taken a back
seat, yet recent bank defaults and corporate scandals have shown the devastating effect
poor operational risk management can yield. This three-day program enables delegates
to identify and manage operational risk while complying with Basel II. Participants leave
the course with effective tools to develop internal control mechanisms and reduce and
avoid enterprise-wide operational risk management. Topics include:
Defining operational risk •
Quantitative & qualitative methods for effectively measuring operational risk •
Examining risk models •
Implementing appropriate IT solutions to reduce risk •
Understanding Basel II – regulatory guidelines and impact for financial institutions •
Implementing best practices to comply with Basel II •
Who Should Attend: Operations management staff, IT executives, operational risk
managers, back office managers, settlement officers, internal auditors, risk auditors.
Prerequisites: Introduction to Operational Risk or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Risk Analysis
Overview of Basel II ■ DN
Dates January 24
M
; April 3
D
; June 3
M
;
October 17
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 a.m. – 4:30 p.m.
Level Introductory
Code CRED1010
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Increasingly more banks are complying with Basel II requirements. These regulatory
requirements are having significant impact on banks’ risk management, regulatory
requirements and compliance, and the use of derivatives. This one-day course is
targeted to professionals who need an overview of the key components of Basel II
requirements
Who Should Attend: Credit and risk officers, business analysts working on Basel II,
audit and compliance officers, regulators, finance and IT personnel.
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of banking, cash products, and derivatives.
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 43
Derivatives: Many markets are exhibiting a level of volatility that is not only historically
high, but also gives the appearance of being long-lasting. Derivatives serve a two-fold purpose in
addressing this volatility—they offer hedging protection for the cautious investor and profit opportunities
for the more aggressive. New York Institute of Finance courses offer everything from a basic introduction
to these complex instruments to advanced strategies suitable for active portfolio management.
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging ■ DB
Dates March 10–12
M
, June 23–25
D
,
September 15–17
M
,
November 10–12
D
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code AATX2050
Instructor Marc Cherney
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this three-day, revised and updated course, participants learn to recognize and
distinguish between fair value and cash flow hedges, and to apply FAS 133 and
amendments to the accounting for qualifying hedges. Beginning with an overview of
derivatives and their uses as hedging instruments, the course progresses from the
fundamental applications of hedge accounting treatment to more complex applications
of FAS 133 and its amendments. Group discussions, short examples, and case problems
illustrate and apply the concepts of hedging and hedge accounting. Topics include:
Qualifying for hedge accounting •
treatment
Testing for hedge effectiveness •
Hedging price risk for commodities •
Hedging interest rate risk, interest rate •
swaps, foreign currency hedges, and
currency swaps
Identifying and accounting for •
embedded derivatives
Normal purchase and sales exclusions •
Internal controls over derivatives •
Recent developments in accounting for •
derivatives
Who Should Attend: Accountants, auditors, regulators, analysts, consultants and
others who seek a broad, yet comprehensive understanding of FAS 133 and its
amendments.
Prerequisites: A fundamental understanding of GAAP accounting principles. A basic
understanding of derivatives, such as forwards, futures and options, is also helpful.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Mergers and Acquisitions.
Advanced Options Trading Strategies ■ DB
Dates March 3–4
M
, June 2–3
D
,
September 22–23
M
,
November 10–11
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code DERV4000
Instructor Jeff Augen
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This two-day discussion will cover strategies for structuring high-return option
positions that take advantage of the effects of rapid underlying price changes, volatility
swings, expiration-related time decay acceleration, and option price distortions that
typically accompany planned events and earnings releases. The course will review
structured trades that range from simple to complex with a focus on dynamic position
management. Trading examples will be explained in the context of historical price
change behavior which we will study using a variety of analytical approaches and
charting techniques. The closely followed CBOE Volatility Index and strategies for
hedging portfolio risk using VIX options is also discussed. Trading examples will reflect
the market realities of bid: ask spreads, volatility skews, collateral requirements, and
contract liquidity.
Who Should Attend: Investors (institutional or private) who use options as a primary
trading vehicle, and are interested in exploiting the advantages of complex structured
positions. Portfolio managers seeking to use options as a hedge to protect other
investments. Option traders who are interested in limiting their market exposure
by taking advantage of specific events and time frames. Any investor interested in
understanding subtle pricing inefficiencies that arise in the options markets.
Prerequisites: Options I & II or equivalent knowledge.
Derivatives
44 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Credit Default Swaps: From Vanilla to Exotic ■ nB
Dates March 26
M
, April 3
S
,
September 15
M
Sessions 6 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV3003
Instructor Wilfred Daye
Cost $1,775
CPE Credits 15.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Credit derivatives is one of the most successful innovations of financial engineering over
the last ten years. The current active credit derivatives market has produced an array of
new products. This course explores the valuation approaches for vanilla and exotic credit
derivative products while describing the mechanics of each product. Hands-on Excel™/
VBA exercises are used to facilitate theoretical understanding. The class also discusses
real-life position examples as case studies to illustrate applications of credit derivatives.
Participants:
Understand intuitions behind various valuation approaches •
Develop hands-on, spreadsheet modeling skills •
Build basic pricing models for credit derivative products •
Demonstrate application of these skills to solve a variety of investment related •
problems
Who Should Attend: Anyone who has an interest in credit derivatives.
Prerequisites: A solid understanding of Excel™.
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate ■ DnBC
Dates January 16–17
S
,
February 20–21
D
, May 7–8
S
,
July 24–25
M
, August 21–22
S
,
August 26–27
M
,
November 3–4
M
,
December 9–10
S
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV2008
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates January 28
M
, April 28
D
,
September 18
M
Sessions 6 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRED2053
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $1,775
CPE Credits 15.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Credit has always been the most intractable of the financial risks to manage. The
application of derivative risk management technology to credit risk has resulted
in making credit derivatives a rapidly growing market segment with a high rate of
innovation. This hands-on course guides participants through the characteristics and
mechanics of credit derivative products being created. It focuses on their creation, need,
and evaluation. Topics include:
Mechanics of the “standard” credit derivative transaction •
Most common variations of structured credit products •
Mechanics of pricing and hedging •
Who Should Attend: Treasury managers, credit analysts, financial analysts, traders.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Derivatives, Derivative Products I and/or II or
equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives, Risk Management of Derivatives,
Risk Management Suite
Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives ■ D
Dates March 10–11
M
,
September 8–9
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV2053
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In recent years, over-the-counter (OTC) swaps and options have developed from a new
product into a standard risk management tool. Yet despite derivatives’ commonplace
nature, establishing an effective risk management process remains a challenging
undertaking. This courses uses hands-on spreadsheets with a simplified mathematical
framework to illustrate the general theory for evaluating the risk of over-the-counter
derivative transactions. The focus is on the practical implementation issues for
establishing an effective risk management process. Topics include:
Measuring, monitoring and controlling risk •
Evaluating role of credit risk manager •
Identifying types of risk •
Who Should Attend: Brokers, traders, treasury managers, credit and financial analysts.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Derivatives, Derivative Products I and/or II or
equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Derivatives, Risk Management Suite
Derivatives
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 45
Demystifying Derivatives ■ D
Dates May 6
D
, November 12
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code RISK1009
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides students with the basic reasons people use derivatives and takes
some of the mystery and jargon out of this often arcane and misunderstood market. The
course describes the market participants and delineates the products into three primary
product lines: futures & forwards, options, and swaps.
Starting with market participants who make use of derivative products, this course
then layers on the derivative products they use. Perhaps most importantly, it discusses
why they use these products. Uses and applications are covered in a real-world market
sensitive nature using the concerns of today’s risk managers.
Who Should Attend: Asset managers, trading assistants, sales assistants, compliance
managers.
Prerequisites: A basic knowledge of capital markets: how and why corporations raise
money (debt or equity) and how those products trade in the market.
Follow-Up Courses: Fundamentals of Derivatives, Derivative Products I and/or II,
Derivatives Suite
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and Management ■ DN
Dates March 12–14
M
, April 8–10
S
,
August 25–27
D
,
October 14–16
S
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV 2060
Instructor Jack Foster
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and Management course offers an overview of how
to analyze cash flows for a single transaction, aggregate cash flows for all derivative
products, ascertain peak credit exposures, determine accurate derivative credit costs,
contrast derivative trading with derivative credit risk, and achieve consensus among
traders and credit officers as they develop policies and systems to govern derivative
transactions.
The concepts and techniques offered in this course are useful not only for identifying
derivative credit risk within a counterparty’s overall credit risk but also for refining credit
policies. The course outlines steps for gradually implementing increasingly sophisticated
techniques for measuring, costing and managing derivative exposure.
Who Should Attend: Credit officers, credit administrators, and derivative sales
personnel, and traders.
Prerequisites: No previous derivative experience is required.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Portfolio Risk Management, Hedge Fund Credit Risk
Judgment and Management, Credit Default Swaps: From Vanilla to Exotic
Derivative Mathematics ■ DnBC
Dates June 10–11
M
,
December 2–3
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV2052
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates August 26
M
Sessions 8 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV2010
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $1,975
CPE Credits 20.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course highlights mathematical formulas for valuing and analyzing listed and
over-the-counter derivatives contracts. It covers the variables affecting the value of a
derivative and considers the underlying asset/cash market. It also includes hedging
applications, trading strategies and arbitrage situations. Topics include:
Futures/forwards •
Options •
Caps/floors •
Plain vanilla swaps •
Complex swaps •
Who Should Attend: Traders, treasury managers, comptrollers, brokers, credit analysts,
financial analysts, and financial planners.
Prerequisites: Basic understanding of the terminology and characteristics of options
and future contracts. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives
Derivatives
46 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Derivatives in Emerging Markets ■ D
Dates March 17–18
M
, October 6–7
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV3005
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Banks in the emerging markets are increasingly using derivatives products. An
understanding of the types of derivatives being used and how close the banks are to
meeting Basel II requirements is essential for any professional working with banks in
emerging markets. The course focuses on the top emerging markets in Latin America,
Eastern Europe, Southeast Asia, and Africa. Attention is also paid to the capacity of
central banks in those countries to examine those players in their home countries.
Topics include:
Overview of emerging markets characteristics •
Supervisory and regulatory capacity in emerging markets •
Emerging markets and Basel II •
Overview of derivatives use in emerging markets •
Non-deliverable forwards •
Credit derivatives •
Options and structured products •
Emerging market sovereigns and multilateral banks •
Risks in derivatives use in emerging markets •
Who Should Attend: Risk managers, country managers, emerging markets
professionals, bankers, and analysts.
Prerequisites: A basic understanding of derivatives.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives, Credit Default Swaps
Derivative Products I & II Suite – Intensive q DBC
Dates April 21–22
D
, August 13–14
M
,
December 10–11
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV2056
Instructor McCabe Hurley
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Take both classes and
Save $575!
This program focuses on the fundamentals of derivative products. Day one explores the
characteristics, features, applications, and pricing of forward rate agreements, Eurodollar
features, interest rate swaps, and options, as well as caps, floors, and collars. It examines
which variables impact option prices using computer software specifically designed for
capital markets and derivatives training.
Day two builds on Derivative Products I, and begins with the examination of swap
valuation using the par, spot, and forward curves and how these curves are derived.
Asset swaps are explored and how the spread over or under LIBOR is determined. The
pricing of caps, floors, and collars is examined, and how they are embedded in fixed
income securities. Derivative securities are introduced, securities are decomposed into
their component parts, and swaptions use in conjunction with callable bonds is also
examined. Finally, the class looks at how equity linked notes are structured.
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales and business development professionals, back
office staff, financial analysts, auditors, and compliance staff.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of the securities industry or equivalent knowledge, 2-3
years financial markets experience working for a bank or brokerage firm who is currently
in the derivatives business. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Derivatives, Options Volatility Trading, Derivatives Suite
Derivative Products I q DC
Dates April 21
D
, August 13
M
,
December 10
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code DERV2011
Instructor McCabe Hurley
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students explore the fundamental characteristics, features, and applications of
derivative products. Particular attention is paid to options pricing and the examination
of the Black-Scholes and binomial models. Topics include:
Pricing of forward rate agreements •
Interest rate swaps •
Options, caps, floors, and collars •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales and business development professionals, back
office staff, financial analysts, auditors, and compliance staff.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of the Securities Industry or equivalent knowledge, two
to three years financial markets experience working for a bank or brokerage firm who is
currently in the derivatives business. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Derivative Products II, Credit Derivatives, Options Volatility Trading,
Derivatives Suite
Derivatives
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 47
Derivative Products II q DC
Dates April 22
D
, August 14
M
,
December 11
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV2045
Instructor McCabe Hurley
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students drill down into the world of derivative products using computer software
designed specifically for capital markets and derivatives training. Topics include:
Swap valuation using par, spot, and •
forward curves
Pricing of caps, floors and collars •
Swaptions •
Callable bonds •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales and business development professionals, back
office staff, financial analysts, auditors and compliance staff.
Prerequisites: Derivative Products I or Fundamentals of the Securities Industry or
equivalent knowledge, two to three years financial markets experience working for a
bank or brokerage firm who is currently in the derivatives business. Financial calculator
required.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Derivatives, Options Volatility Trading, Derivatives Suite
Derivatives Suite q DBC
Dates March 10–14
M
, June 9–13
D
,
October 13–17
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV2029
Instructor Various
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Take the full suite
of courses
Save $2,700
In this program, participants develop their expertise in one of the most rapidly growing
areas in international finance. Derivative instruments describe the basics of swaps,
caps, floors, forward rate agreements, captions, and swaptions. This program explores
hedging from both a micro and macro perspective, sophisticated off-balance sheet
activities and their effect on bank capital standards, and mastering pricing, including
direct versus synthetic pricing. Topics include:
Forwards, futures, options and swaps •
Pricing and application •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales professionals, back office professionals, financial
analysts, cash/money managers, auditors, compliance professionals, financial and bank
officers, accountants, and regulators.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Forwards & Futures q DC
Dates March 10
M
, June 9
D
,
October 13
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code DERV1008
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Participants gain a broad perspective of both futures and forwards markets, and
understand the important role they play in the world economy. Topics include:
Margin and settlement •
Pricing techniques •
Forward curve •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales professionals, back office professionals, financial
analysts, cash/money managers, auditors, compliance professionals, financial and bank
officers, accountants, and regulators.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives, Credit Derivatives, Credit Risk of OTC
Derivatives, Risk Management of Derivatives
Options Markets I q DC
Dates March 11
M
, June 10
D
,
October 14
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code DERV1005
Instructor Bill Addiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Through a series of lectures, exercises, and case studies, students learn the basic
terminology, products, strategies, and techniques that spell success in the options
market regardless of market environment. Topics include:
Risk/reward characteristics •
Options transactions •
Hedging and trading strategies •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales professionals, back office professionals, financial
analysts, cash/money managers, auditors, compliance professionals, financial and bank
officers, accountants, and regulators.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives, Credit Derivatives, Credit Risk of OTC
Derivatives, Risk Management of Derivatives
Derivatives
48 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Options Markets II q DC
Dates March 12
M
, June 11
D
,
October 15
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV2005
Instructor McCabe Hurley
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Building on the knowledge gained in Options Market I, participants use case studies and
market scenarios to drill down further into strategy. Participants:
Explore the Greeks •
Manage an options book •
Review profit and loss implications •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales professionals, back office professionals, financial
analysts, cash/money managers, auditors, compliance professionals, financial and bank
officers, accountants, and regulators.
Prerequisites: Options Markets I or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator
required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives, Credit Derivatives, Credit Risk of OTC
Derivatives, Risk Management of Derivatives
Swaps I q DC
Dates March 13
M
, June 12
D
,
October 16
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code DERV1006
Instructor Bill Addiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course covers the basic structure, characteristics, and features of swaps, and
examines the pricing and risks associated with this derivative instrument.Topics include:
Interest rate and currency markets •
Swaps, caps, floors, and collars •
ISDA documentation •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales professionals, back office professionals, financial
analysts, cash/money managers, auditors, compliance professionals, financial and bank
officers, accountants, and regulators.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives, Credit Derivatives, Credit Risk of OTC
Derivatives, Risk Management of Derivatives
Swaps II q DC
Dates March 14
M
, June 13
D
,
October 17
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV2012
Instructor McCabe Hurley
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Building on the concepts taught in Swaps I, participants gain expertise in critical areas
such as structure, pricing, and documentation. Topics include:
Creation of synthetic instruments •
Managing a swap portfolio •
Risk-based capital guidelines •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales professionals, back office professionals, financial
analysts, cash/money managers, auditors, compliance professionals, financial and bank
officers, accountants, and regulators.
Prerequisites: Swaps I or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives, Credit Derivatives, Credit Risk of OTC
Derivatives, Risk Management of Derivatives
Derivatives and Financial Statements ■ DNC
Dates March 6
M
, September 16
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV 2059
Instructor Jack Foster
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Do you have a fundamental understanding of derivatives? Need to know more about
derivatives and the meaning of corporate footnotes? The use of actual examples, case
studies, and explanations will be provided to demystify the numbers and explain the
applications of these various strategies and financial instruments.
Equity swaps •
Options fundamentals •
Option pricing •
Hedging •
Index replication •
Equity-linked notes •
Warrants •
Convertible bonds •
Exotic options •
Who Should Attend: Analysts and associates, bankers (corporate and investment), IT
and operations personnel, sales and sales support.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging, Derivative Mathematics,
Derivatives & Financial Statements
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 49
Derivatives in Energy Markets ■ D
Dates June 23–24
M
,
December 1–2
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV3006
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
With the significant rise in oil and gas prices in the last few years, it is no surprise that
energy companies, banks, and hedge funds have become very active in trying to hedge
their risks through OTC and exchange traded energy derivatives. This course explores
the mechanics and applications of commodity forwards, futures, swaps, and options
and how they are used in hedging strategies. It examines best practices for company risk
management and ways of identifying, measuring, monitoring, and controlling risks in
energy derivatives. Participants learn the role of regulators in these markets and explore
recent developments in energy derivative markets through articles and case studies.
Topics include:
Influential factors in energy markets •
Risk management in the energy sector •
Introduction to commodity forwards •
Commodity swaps •
Commodity futures •
Hedging strategies •
Regulators and energy derivatives •
Who Should Attend: Traders, brokers, commodity specialists, bankers, analysts and
associates, and product specialists.
Prerequisites: A basic understanding of derivatives.
Derivative Product Transaction Processing ■ DC
Dates February 27
D
, June 23
D
,
November 17
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Code DERV 1022
Level Intermediate
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day program focuses on the processing of transactions emanating from the fast
growing derivative market. Among the products discussed are: over-the-counter options,
currency forwards, interest rate swaps, swaptions and credit default swaps. The program
takes the participant from the time the trade is made until it is settled. Along the way,
terminology and forms unique to these products will be explained as to content and
purpose. As these derivatives use different underlying products, the properties of those
products themselves are delved into, including the application of margin and delivery
processes.
Who Should Attend: Back office operational personnel, system developers, regulatory
personnel, industry service organizations personnel.
Prerequisites: Brokerage Operations or Fundamentals of the Security Industry.
Financial calculator required.
Equity Derivatives ■ DnBC
Dates March 18–19
S
, March 25–26
M
,
September 17–18
S
,
October 28–29
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV2013
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Date June 11
M
Sessions 6 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV3004
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $1,775
CPE Credits 15.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This class explores equity futures, swaps, options, and other derivative products. Focus
is on their uses, pricing, and the risks associated with these instruments. Topics include:
Equity swaps •
Options fundamentals •
Option pricing •
Hedging •
Index replication •
Equity-linked notes •
Warrants •
Convertible bonds •
Exotic options •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales staff, back office professionals, financial analysts,
cash/money managers, auditors, and compliance staff.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives, Derivatives Suite, Risk Management
Suite
Derivatives
Derivatives
50 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Exotic CDOs ■ DN
Dates January 25
M
, April 2
D
,
June 4
M
, October 16
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 a.m. – 4:30 p.m.
Level Intermediate
Code DERV3007
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group Live
Method
In the last five years, as the desire to speculate has increased, so has the use of
collateralized debt obligations. Moreover, Basel II requirements, in some cases, have
also encouraged many financial instruments to use Special Investment Vehicles (SIVs) as
an aggressive way to increase flexibility in their balance sheets. Yet, the current credit
crisis in the markets demonstrates that investors, regulators, and rating entities need
to increase their knowledge about these products’ use, pricing opacity, and liquidity
challenges.
Who Should Attend: This one-day intermediate level course is targeted to structured
products personnel, credit and risk officers, credit and equity analysts, regulators,
auditors, lawyers, and compliance, IT, and operations personnel, financial journalists
who have an introductory knowledge of credit derivatives and/or of collateralized debt
obligations.
Prerequisites: Introduction to Credit Derivatives
Fundamentals of Derivatives ■ nBC
Dates January 23
M
, April 2
M
,
September 2
M
Sessions 10 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code DERV1001
Instructor McCabe Hurley
Cost $2,275
CPE Credits 25.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This 10-evening course is a comprehensive introduction to derivative products and the
application of derivative tools in financial engineering and risk management. Topics include:
Terminology •
Mechanics •
Pricing •
Trading •
Hedging strategies •
T-bill and Eurodollar futures •
Currency and interest rate swaps and options •
Black-Scholes and binomial trees •
Who Should Attend: Traders, sales professionals, back office professionals, financial
analysts, cash/money managers, auditors, and compliance professionals.
Prerequisites: Derivative I or equivalent knowledge, two to three years financial
market experience, working for a back office or brokerage firm who is currently in the
derivatives business. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives, Equity Derivatives, Credit Derivatives,
Derivative Mathematics, Introduction to Financial Risk Management
Introduction to Credit Derivatives ■ DC
Dates January 15
S
, February 12
M
,
May 6
S
, May 13
M
, August 20
S
,
September 18
M
, December 8
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code DERV 1023
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladaro
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day course assumes that participants have no or minimal knowledge of credit
derivatives. The instruction is interactive and will involve exercises and articles about
recent developments in credit derivatives. Participants will work individually and in
teams.
Who Should Attend: Treasury managers, credit analysts, financial analysts, traders,
operations personnel, auditors, compliance officers, lawyers and regulators.
Prerequisites: Knowledge of derivative contracts. Financial calculator required.
Options Markets ■ nBC
Dates March 27
M
, October 2
M
Sessions 10 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code DERV1014
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $2,275
CPE Credits 25.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This 10-evening course examines market structure, trading strategies, and the features
of listed calls and puts, and discusses the management of an options portfolio. Topics
include:
Regulations •
Tax considerations •
Margin requirements •
Who Should Attend: Floor and compliance personnel, trade support staff seeking
advancement, and marketing staff.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Derivative Mathematics, Risk Management Suite, Options Volatility
Trading
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 51
Financial Modeling: The benefits to using spreadsheet modeling for financial
management and valuation are undisputed in the world of finance. New York Institute of Finance’s
hands-on modeling classes provide the skills needed to build models and provide practical financial
modeling techniques.
Complex LBO Modeling & Enhancement ■ DN
Dates January 7–9
M
, June 2–4
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code FIMD5001
Instructor Hamilton Lin
Cost $3,275
CPE Credit 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
New York Institute of Finance, in conjunction with Wall Street Training, presents the
following course. Leverage buyouts (LBOs) are among the most risky and complex
financial transactions and typically sets the floor or minimum valuation. In this course,
learn how to build a leveraged buyout model. This is a highly complex and a very
advanced modeling class. It requires an absolute grasp of all basic and advanced
accounting and financial concepts. Your finished LBO model will be a highly versatile and
functional financial model able to capture and sensitize a great deal of inputs to project
a realistic and more precise outcome. Participants will build a fully integrated financial
statement projection model with income statement projections, a self-balancing balance
sheet, an automated cash flow statement, and the balancing cash flow sweep/debt
schedule. Emphasis is on the integration of the major financial statements and becoming
experts in Excel™. Build up to the complex LBO model by discussing an important review
of the drivers of value in an LBO and recapitalization. Then construct a short, quick-
and-dirty analysis that incorporates all the major inputs and value drivers of an LBO
transaction. Provides an excellent condensed overview and introduction to LBO modeling.
Who Should Attend: Investment bankers, mergers and acquisitions professionals,
leveraged finance and credit professionals, private equity, buyout, and venture capital
professionals, internal M&A and business development staff, CFOs, VPs of finance,
financial analysts and related function, new hires, and those being groomed for
management.
Prerequisites: Proficiency in accounting and financial statements, basic corporate
finance, and valuation topics. Basic, general knowledge or interest in leveraged buyouts.
Solid proficiency in Excel™. Note: to maximize the value and productivity of this course,
participants must be proficient and comfortable with Excel™—a lack of Excel™ skills
will hamper the ability to properly follow along and acquire the best practices and
efficiencies that are presented. Personal laptop required.
Follow-Up Courses: Super-Advanced Merger Modeling
Core Skills Analyst Program – Financial Modeling ■ DC
Dates January 7–11
M
(Module Only)
April 21–25
M
(CSA Program)
August 25–29
M
(CSA Program)
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code CRPF2034
Instructor Jim Morris
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The benefits of using spreadsheet modeling for financial management and valuation are
undisputed in the world of finance. This module provides hands-on modeling experience
that begins with construction of a basic financial model and ends with completion
of a full-scale forecasted model with valuation components. This module provides
practical modeling tips and techniques, as well as valuation tools for valuing a company
and determining the effects of mergers and acquisitions. Actual company financial
statements are used. Topics include:
Tips and tricks •
Linking sheets •
Multiple spreadsheet models •
Logical tests •
Look-up tables •
D functions •
String functions •
Data tables •
Consolidations •
Macros •
Scenarios •
Building financial models ( • pro-forma
modeling)
Discounted cash flow analysis, •
estimated cost of capital, EVA
Market multiples, transaction •
multiples
Valuing debt and convertible •
securities, share repurchases
Warrant valuation and stock options •
Special valuation issues •
Who Should Attend: Entry-level professionals, investment professionals, research
analysts, corporate bankers, fixed income analysts, credit analysts, equity analysts,
mergers and acquisitions professionals and mid-level career transitions.
Prerequisites: Undergraduate degree or equivalent, fluency in English, proficiency in
basic Excel™, word processing skills. Financial calculator required.
Financial Modeling for Corporate Finance ■ nB
Dates January 28
M
, June 2
M

Sessions 6 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Intermediate
Code FIMD3004
Instructor NYIF Instructor
Cost $1,775
CPE Credits 15.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Starting with basic modeling functions, this course progresses through complex
modeling skills, including lookups, indexing, and valuation approaches. In addition
to discussing the mechanics of how to build a model, it also covers techniques
and calculations specific to corporate finance and valuing assets as well as accrual
accounting valuations. Best practices of both design and implementation are covered.
Topics include:
Discounted cash flow models (DCF) •
Net present value (NPV) •
Weighted average costs of capital •
(WACC)
Projecting financial statements for M&A •
Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) •
Valuation using multiples •
Accretion/dilution •
Who Should Attend: Business managers, financial managers, investors, corporate
finance analysts, and board members.
Prerequisites: A solid knowledge of financial statements and the basics of corporate
finance, such as TVM, cash flows and discounting. A good knowledge of Excel™.
Follow-Up Courses: Mergers & Acquisitions: Structuring the Deal, Mergers &
Acquisitions: Concepts and Theories
Insurance Company Financial Modeling ■ DN
Dates March 17–19
M
,
October 20–22
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code FIMD3005
Instructor Hamilton Lin
Cost $3,275
CPE Credit 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
New York Institute of Finance, in conjunction with Wall Street Training, presents the
following course: Build a fully integrated, scalable, new insurance company model
including detailed build-up by line of business from gross written premiums down to
underwriting income. Consolidate the lines of business performance into a GAAP income
statement with statutory adjustments. Integrate income statement projections with a
self-balancing balance sheet, an automated cash flow statement, and the balance cash
flow sweep schedule.
Who Should Attend: Insurance company/insurance broker management and
professionals, Financial Institutions Group (FIG) or insurance investment bankers,
mergers and acquisitions professionals, leveraged finance and credit professionals,
controller, accounting, internal audit and reporting roles, internal M&A and business
development staff, CFOs, VPs of finance, financial analysts and related functions, new
hires and those being groomed for management.
Prerequisites: Proficiency in accounting and financial statements, basic corporate
finance and valuation topics. Basic, general knowledge or interest in insurance
operations. Solid proficiency in Excel™. Note: To maximize the value and productivity
of this course, participants must be proficient and comfortable with Excel™—a lack
of Excel™ skills will hamper the ability to properly follow along and acquire the best
practices and efficiencies that are presented. Personal laptop required.
Follow-Up Courses: Financial Analysis of Insurance Companies
Financial Modeling
52 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Super-Advanced Merger Modeling ■ DN
Dates February 4–7
M
,
September 22–25
M
Sessions 4 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code FIMD5000
Instructor Hamilton Lin
Cost $3,975
CPE Credits 28.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
New York Institute of Finance, in conjunction with Wall Street Training, presents the
following course. Construct a full-blown merger model that combines two fully integrated
projection models. Combine major financial statements and new complex debt sweep
calculation. Fully sensitize different transaction structures such as cash and stock
consideration, various financing scenarios, accretion/dilution and credit ratios. Account
for purchase price allocation including step-up of assets to fair market value, intangibles,
goodwill and other considerations. Start by building a fully integrated financial statement
projection model with income statement projections, a self-balancing balance sheet,
an automated cash flow statement and the balancing cash flow sweep/debt schedule.
Emphasis is on the integration of the major financial statements and becoming experts
in Excel. Focus is then on the mergers and acquisitions process, the basics of deal
structures, and the main tools and analysis the M&A investment bankers and acquirers
utilize. Learn about common structured issues, crucial merger consequence analysis,
and alternative earn-out structures and methodologies.
Build up to the advanced content by building merger models first by covering different
ways to model out financial combinations. Different techniques are covered including
the most basic and widely used back-of-the-envelope method, accretion/dilution, as
well as a more robust combination analysis combining a target and acquirer’s income
statement. Learn how to sensitize basic deal structures and combination options.
Who Should Attend: Investment bankers, mergers and acquisitions professionals,
leveraged finance and credit professionals, private equity, buyout, and venture capital
professionals, internal M&A and business development staff, CFOs, VPs of finance,
financial analysts, and related functions, new hires and those being groomed for
management.
Prerequisites: Proficiency in accounting and financial statements, basic corporate
finance, and valuation topics. Basic, general knowledge or interest in mergers and
acquisitions. Solid proficiency in Excel™. Note: To maximize the value and productivity
of this course, participants must be proficient and comfortable with Excel--a lack
of Excel skills will hamper the ability to properly follow along and acquire the best
practices and efficiencies that are presented. Personal laptop required.
Follow-Up Courses: Complex LBO Modeling & Enhancement, Accounting for Mergers &
Acquisitions
Using Excel™ to Solve Financial Problems ■ D
Dates April 28
M
, September 8
M

Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code FIMD1000
Instructor NYIF Instructor
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
While Excel™ is a remarkably powerful platform that can be used to solve a wide variety
of financial problems, most users of Excel™ use only its more basic capabilities. This
course exposes the application’s more powerful capabilities including goal seeker,
tracing, auditing, protection, solver, creating macros, loading, and updating real time
data, and using XML schemas. In addition, this course demonstrates a number of Excel™
add-ins that simplify the creation of very complicated and powerful models using Monte
Carlo analysis. To illustrate the application’s capabilities, participants build a series of
spreadsheets that value corporate debt, optimize a strategic asset allocation, value a
growth stock, hedge strategic FX risk, and value exotic options.
Who Should Attend: Anyone in the financial industry who uses Excel™.
Prerequisites: Basic Excel™ skills.
Follow-Up Courses: Portfolio Management Suite, Financial Modeling for Corporate
Finance, Essentials of Business Valuation, Essentials of Corporate Finance
Financial Modeling
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 53
Fixed Income: The size of the fixed income markets continues to grow with an
estimated $24 trillion in outstanding levels of public and private debt. The New York Institute of Finance
offers a wide variety of courses covering every important aspect of these markets: the characteristics of
corporate, municipal, and sovereign debt instruments; the evaluation of the credit standing of bonds from
investment grade to high-yield; the mathematical aspects of bond pricing and trading; securitized assets;
mortgage-backed securities; money market instruments, and much more.
Fixed Income Suite q DBC
Dates January 21–25
S
,
February 25–29
M
May 5–9
S
, May 12–16
D
July 7–11
M
, July 28–August 1
S
,
September 15–19
D
,
November 3–7
M
,
November 17–21
S
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code FIMK2002
Instructor Bill Addiss
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Save $2,125
Attend all five days
for $4,675
This modularized suite serves as an essential introduction to the fixed income markets. It
benefits those new to the bond market, as well as those in related areas of the business
seeking to expand their knowledge. Topics include:
Characteristics of corporate debt •
Government and asset-backed securities •
Convertible stocks and bonds, covering theories, techniques, and real-life applications •
Who Should Attend: Newcomers to the bond markets, institutional sales staff, sales,
and capital markets assistants.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Fixed Income Markets I q DC
Dates January 21
S
, February 25
M
,
May 5
S
, May 12
D
, July 7
M
,
July 28
S
, September 15
D
,
November 3
M
, November 17
S
,
December 15
M
(Module Only)
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code FIMK1005
Instructor Angelo DeCandia
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Once considered a safe haven, fixed income investing now presents an array of choices
for every risk profile. This course provides a comprehensive overview of the fixed income
market. Topics include:
Basic bond terminology •
Bond fundamentals •
Yield calculations •
Specifics of corporate, government, and municipal bonds •
Who Should Attend: Sales personnel, junior research analysts, operations and systems
staff, new entrants to fixed income markets, finance analysts, and corporate bankers.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Fixed Income Markets II
54 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Bond Mathematics q DC
Dates January 22
S
, February 26
M
,
May 6
S
, May 13
D
, July 8
M
,
July 29
S
, September 16
D
,
November 4
M
, November 18
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code FIMK3002
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course explores and analyzes the mathematics of bond prices and yields, as well as
a variety of quantitative analytical methodologies. The course begins with an in-depth
investigation of the industry conventions for calculating price and yield applied to plain
vanilla bonds, including the exploration of implicit assumptions and interpretation
of resulting numbers. Subsequently, the course turns to a variety of tools used in the
pricing, valuation, and risk quantification of fixed income securities and portfolios. These
tools are applied to a variety of other fixed income instruments: bonds with embedded
options, mortgage-backed securities, and interest rate futures. Topics include:
Calculation of price and yield •
Factors that determine the level of interest rates and the shape of the yield curve •
Use of spot and forward rates and curves in the valuation and analysis of fixed income •
securities
Duration and convexity in quantifying and managing risk •
Who Should Attend: Portfolio managers, institutional sales staff, and research
analysts, back office professionals, financial analysts, cash/money managers, auditors,
and compliance staff.
Prerequisites: Fixed Income Markets I or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator
required.
Follow-Up Courses: Yield Curve Analysis
Fixed Income Markets II q DC
Dates January 23–24
S
,
February 27–28
M
, May 7–8
S
,
May 14–15
D
, July 9–10
M
,
July 30–31
S
,
September 17–18
D
,
November 5–6
M
,
November 19–20
S
,
December 16–17
M
(Module Only)
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code FIMK2007
Instructor Bill Addiss / Angelo DeCandia
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Continuing on from Fixed Income Markets I, this course examines the evolving products,
changing marketplace and growing sophistication of the fixed income market. Topics
include:
Trading desk psychology •
Current market conditions •
Internal policies of the Federal Reserve •
Yield curve construction and analysis •
Who Should Attend: Sales personnel, junior research analysts, operations and systems
staff, new entrants to fixed income markets, finance analysts and corporate bankers.
Prerequisites: Fixed Income Markets I or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator
required.
Follow-Up Courses: Fixed Income Mathematics, Yield Curve Analysis
Yield Curve Analysis q DC
Dates January 25
S
, February 29
M
,
May 9
S
, May 16
D
, July 11
M
,
August 1
S
, September 19
D
,
November 7
M
, Novemer 21
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code FIMK3001
Instructor Bill Addiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The bond market changes daily. Specifically, the yield curve changes daily. This course
addresses these movements which cause changes in investor attitude, the relative value
of certain products, and the appeal of certain investments over others. Topics include:
Construction and analysis of the yield curve •
Mathematics of the yield curve •
Relationship between changes in the shape of the curve or the spread between the •
curves
Determination of the level and the shape of the term structure of interest rates •
Who Should Attend: Trade support staff, sales assistants, and portfolio management
assistants.
Prerequisites: Fixed Income Markets I and II, or equivalent knowledge. Financial
calculator required.
Fixed Income
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 55
Convertible Bonds ■ D
Dates April 29–30
M
, July 29–30
D
,
December 16–17
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code FIMK2038
Instructor Bill Addiss
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Participants learn about convertible bonds and the role they play in the fixed income
markets. They examine features of the basic convertible bond, as well as alternative
structures. This course covers the advantages and disadvantages of convertibles from
both the investor and issuer perspectives. Topics include:
Analysis of risk/reward characteristics •
Valuation of embedded options •
Investment and hedging strategies •
Convertible arbitrage •
Who Should Attend: Finance analysts, equity analysts, corporate bankers, traders.
Prerequisites: Fixed Income I or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Fixed Income Markets I & II, Fixed Income Mathematics, High Yield
Debt: Valuation and Risk Assessement
Fixed Income Markets I ■ nBC
Dates January 15
M
, May 13
D
,
September 16
D

Sessions 4 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code FIMK1001
Instructor Doug Carroll / NYIF Instructor
Cost $1,575
CPE Credits 20.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Once considered a safe haven, fixed income investing now presents an array of choices
for every risk profile. This course gives a comprehensive overview of the fixed income
market. Topics include:
Basic bond terminology •
Bond fundamentals •
Yield calculations •
Specifics of corporate, government, and •
municipal bonds
Who Should Attend: Sales personnel, junior research analysts, operations and systems
staff, new entrants to fixed income markets, finance analysts, and corporate bankers.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Fixed Income Markets II
Fixed Income Markets II ■ nBC
Dates January 22
M
, September 16
D
Sessions 8 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Intermediate
Code FIMK2030
Instructor Angelo DeCandia / Bill Goodwin
Cost $1,975
CPE Credits 20.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
A continuation of Fixed Income Markets I, this course examines the evolving products,
changing marketplace and growing sophistication of the fixed income market. Topics
include:
Trading desk psychology •
Current market conditions •
Internal policies of the Federal Reserve •
Yield curve construction and analysis •
Who Should Attend: Sales personnel, junior research analysts, operations and systems
staff, new entrants to fixed income markets, finance analysts, and corporate bankers.
Prerequisites: Fixed Income Markets I or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator
required.
Follow-Up Courses: Fixed Income Mathematics, Yield Curve Analysis
Fixed Income
56 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Fixed Income Mathematics ■ DnBC
Dates March 27–28
M
, August 4–5
D
,
October 14–15
D
,
December 9–10
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code FIMK2034
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates June 17
D
, October 27
M
Sessions 8 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Intermediate
Code FIMK2004
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $1,975
CPE Credits 20.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course explores and analyzes the mathematics of bond prices and yields as well as
a variety of quantitative analytical methodologies. The course begins with an in-depth
investigation of the industry conventions for calculating price and yield applied to plain
vanilla bonds, including the exploration of implicit assumptions and interpretation
of resulting numbers. The course then turns to a variety of tools used in the pricing,
valuation, and risk quantification of fixed income securities and portfolios. The tools
are then applied to a variety of other fixed income instruments: bonds with embedded
options, mortgage-backed securities, and interest rate futures. Topics include:
Price and yield •
Factors that determine the level of interest rates and the shape of the yield curve •
Use of spot and forward rates and curves in the valuation and analysis of fixed income •
securities
Duration and convexity in quantifying and managing risk •
Who Should Attend: Portfolio managers, institutional sales staff, and research
analysts, back office professionals, financial analysts, cash/money managers, auditors,
and compliance staff.
Prerequisites: Fixed Income Markets I or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator
required.
Follow-Up Courses: Yield Curve Analysis
High Yield Debt: Valuation & Risk Assessment ■ nBC
Dates April 1
M
Sessions 4 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code FIMK2040
Instructor Angelo DeCandia
Cost $1,575
CPE Credits 10.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this four-session, hands-on course, participants look at various types of high-yield
bonds, with an eye on determining their theoretical value. They also explore various
factors concerning risk and viability as an asset class. Starting with basic bond market
theory and a survey of various sub-sectors of the high yield segment of the bond
markets, attendees look at specific issues for determining credit risk and theoretical
valuation. Participants:
Demonstrate a practical understanding of how to price high-yield bonds •
Determine which factors affect interest rate risk of high-yield bonds •
Examine several real issues to assess theory and fact •
Who Should Attend: Anyone interested in the analytical evaluation of this market,
including those with differing backgrounds such as equity professionals, technology
personnel, or those interested in the suitability of high-yield bonds for personal
investment.
Prerequisites: A basic knowledge of financial industry concepts and a willingness to
participate in hands-on calculations to maximize the course’s value. Financial calculator
required.
Fixed Income
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 57
Market Trends: Cause & Effect on Portfolios ■ DB
Dates March 28
M
, April 16
S
,
September 19
M
,October 22
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code FIMK1014
Instructor Deborah Weir
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this one-day, hands-on computer workshop, participants use the Internet to collect
data and select a security to buy. New investment vehicles allow participants to buy gold
bullion as well as equities, bonds, foreign currencies, and other hard assets. Starting
with a definition of the U.S. treasury yield curve, this workshop progresses to selecting
a specific investment to buy for one’s personal or professional portfolio. In addition to
gathering Federal Reserve data and technical indicators from the Internet, it provides
benchmarks for evaluating this information. Topics include:
Fixed-income relationships •
Federal Reserve actions •
VIX and put/call ratio •
Exchange-traded funds (ETFs) •
Blogging •
Who Should Attend: Anyone who must forecast the economy or the direction of
the stock market, manages his own or others’ portfolios, or who supports portfolio
managers.
Prerequisites : Basic skill in navigating the Internet. A basic understanding of the
Federal Reserve system is helpful. Math is not required.
Follow-Up Courses: Securities Analysis, Fusion Analysis, Options Volatility Trading
Mortgage-Backed Securities ■ DnBC
Dates January 24–25
S
, March 4–5
D
,
June 3–4
M
, July 24–25
S
,
October 7–8
M
,
November 5–6
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code FIMK2039
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates February 7
M
, October 15
D
Sessions 6 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code FIMK2005
Instructor Doug Carroll
Cost $1,775
CPE Credits 15.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides a broad overview of the mortgage-backed securities industry. The
primary focus is on the types of mortgage-backed securities (MBS), factors that influence
their investment characteristics, analytic techniques used to evaluate risk and return,
and MBS trading/ settlement. The course begins with an exploration of agency pass-
through securities and is followed by an investigation of derivative mortgage-backed
securities: collateralized mortgage obligations (CMOs), interest only(IO), and principal
only (PO) strips. The course also discusses trading issues such as TBA trading and dollar
rolls. The final session focuses on non-agency CMOs, and other mortgage-related asset-
backed securities. Topics include:
Characteristics of pass-through securities •
Impact of pricing/yield conventions including PSA •
Analysis of the structure of CMOs and interaction of different tranches •
Exploration of TBA trading and dollar rolls •
Who Should Attend: Sales staff, traders, portfolio managers, credit and financial
analysts.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Structured Products
Fixed Income
58 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Investment & Portfolio Management: The volatility of
the stock market in recent years has led many to reassess their investment management decisions. The
following courses offer insights into all the different asset classes, as well as qualitative and quantitative
methods of analysis for each. The courses are offered at all levels and benefit both investors and those
responsible for effective investment management.
Portfolio Management Suite q DC
Dates February 20–29
M
, June 18–27
M
,
November 12–21
M
Sessions 8 Weekdays
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE2020
Instructor Various
Cost $7,175
CPE Credits 57.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Save $1,750
Attend all eight days
for $7,175
The Portfolio Management Suite is a challenging, but rewarding, eight-day experience:
a three-day module on fixed income; a three-day module on capital markets overview
and equities; and a two-day module specifically on portfolio management. Taken in
sequence or individually, these modules blend traditional lectures and case studies.
Participants gain insights into the global economy drawn from New York Institute of
Finance’s sister company the Financial Times. Topics include:
Asset allocation •
Performance measurement risk control •
Corporate governance •
Quantitative techniques •
Who Should Attend: Junior portfolio managers, money managers, research analysts,
client services staff, consultants, individual and institutional investors, private bankers
and financial advisors, research staff members of pension boards and plan sponsors.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Global Trader, Securities Analysis
Fixed Income Portfolio Management q DC
Dates February 20–22
M
, June 18–20
M
,
November 12–14
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE2017
Instructor Bill Addiss
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The recent period of uncertainty in the equity markets has produced renewed interest in
bonds. Participants discover how principles of diversification and risk control are applied
by fixed income money managers in constructing institutional portfolios. Topics include:
Major segments of the bond market: treasuries, corporates, municipals, mortgage- •
backed securities.
Diversification strategies by quality, segment, and maturity (duration) •
Differentiation among various portfolio strategies such as bullets and barbells, •
laddering, and immunization
The role of fixed income instruments in an overall asset allocation strategy •
Who Should Attend: Junior portfolio managers, money managers, research analysts,
client services staff, consultants, individual and institutional investors, private bankers
and financial advisors, research staff members of pension boards, and plan sponsors.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Equity Portfolio Management, Global Trader, Securities Analysis
Equity Portfolio Management q DC
Dates February 25–27
M
(Suite),
April 7–9
M
(Module Only),
June 23–25
M
(Suite),
November 17–19
M
(Suite),
December 10–12
M
(Module Only)
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE2018
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The risks and rewards of running a stock portfolio should always be seen in an historical
context. It is important never to mistake a bull market for brains—a lesson investors
have recently re-learned after the spectacular performance of equities in the late ’ 90s.
From dividend discount models to corporate governance, this course focuses on stock
selection for the long term. Attention is paid to investment styles such as growth vs.
value; small cap vs. large cap; as well as traditional valuation techniques that emphasize
tangible earnings and real cash flow. Topics include:
Investment philosophies and approaches •
Hands-on strategies for stock selection and equity valuation •
Appropriate performance and risk control measures to portfolio assessment •
Who Should Attend: Junior portfolio managers, money managers, research analysts,
client services staff, consultants, individual and institutional investors, private bankers
and financial advisors, research staff members of pension boards, and plan sponsors.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Stock Investing for Professionals, Advanced Corporate Finance,
Fusion Analysis
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 59
Portfolio Management - Theory & Practice q DC
Dates February 28–29
M
, June 26–27
D
,
November 20–21
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE2019
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The famous economist John Maynard Keynes once said that “…the markets can remain
irrational longer than you or I can remain solvent.” The importance of good portfolio
management is more evident during periods of market volatility and uncertainty. While
acknowledging the contribution of elegant intellectual constructs such as Modern
Portfolio Theory (MPT), this course is far more pragmatic in applying academic theory to
real-world investment decisions. Participants will:
Become familiar with appropriate measures of both risk and return when evaluating •
portfolio performance
Appreciate more fully the importance of asset allocation and proper diversification •
Gain an historical perspective on how different investment styles (growth, value, large •
cap, small cap, indexing) perform over time
Use basic quantitative tools (the science) and asset allocation (the art) •
Analyze various fund structures within various market considerations, including legal, •
tax, liquidity, and performance attributions
Who Should Attend: Junior portfolio managers, money managers, research analysts,
client services staff, consultants, individual and institutional investors, private bankers
and financial advisors, research staff members of pension boards, and plan sponsors.
Prerequisites: Fixed Income Portfolio Management, Equity Portfolio Management, or
equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Stock Investing for Professionals, Introduction to Alternative
Investments
Exchange Traded Funds ■ DB
Dates April 30
M
, August 21
D
,
November 14
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE1034
Instructor Vinny Catalano
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this workshop, participants learn the brief history, dynamic future, and specialized
uses of one of the newest and most actively traded financial instruments around:
Exchange Traded Funds (ETFs). The first ETF traded in Toronto in 1989, and today nearly
200 different ETFs in the U.S. alone present a viable alternative investment option to
traditional open-ended mutual funds, especially open-ended index funds.
There are many available ETFs that attempt to track all kinds of indexes (such as
large-cap, mid-cap, small-cap, etc), specialties (such as value and growth), industries,
countries, and even commodities (while commodity funds like Gold Shares are
technically not ETFs, they trade like ETFs). More are continuously being developed. There
are discussions of ETFs for other indexes and commodities, as well as actively managed
ETFs. ETFs are attractive to investors because they offer diversification of mutual funds
with the features of a stock—and offer investors and institutions unique opportunities as
a hedging instrument.
Who Should Attend: Anyone who is interested in mutual funds, trading equities, and
trading strategies.
Prerequisites: A basic knowledge of the nature of an equity (stock) mutual fund.
Follow-Up Courses: Global Trader
Fund Selection ■ DC
Dates March 5–6
S
,
June 12–13
M
,
August 13–14
S
,
November 24–25
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE2030
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course explores various challenges in determining fund value-added performance
for client investment objectives. “Is my manager giving me my money’s worth?” is
the basic question. Different fund structures, such as mutual funds and hedge funds,
are covered. Participants learn to identify subtle tricks that funds use to “dress up”
performance records and charge unwarranted fees.
Who Should Attend: Investors interested in selecting and evaluating funds, including
specialists in portfolio management, marketing, regulatory, auditing, plan sponsor, and
fund of funds.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Portfolio Management Suite, Wealth Management Program
Investment & Portfolio Management
60 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Fundamentals of Investment Management ■ D
Dates April 29
M
, May 19
D
,
September 26
M
, October 16
M
,
December 1
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE1035
Instructor James Davis
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course is useful in providing training for employees who are seeking a career
in private banking/wealth management. The following would also benefit: service
assistants and relationship officers need to know the basic structure of the business,
how it works, who the participants are, how they operate and other information so they
can present themselves as knowledgeable to staff and clients with whom they interact;
compliance and internal audit specialists also need this information to properly ensure
compliance with applicable laws, rules, and internal procedures. Topics include:
Types of businesses •
Different functions •
Different types of clients •
Various types of investments managed •
How products are sold •
How money is managed •
Regulations •
Investment theories •
The process •
Basic risk/return measurements •
Types of risk •
How we get paid •
Who Should Attend: Staff members who work in an investment management/advisory
area but do not have direct responsibility for investments or client relationships.
Prerequisites: Investment basics or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Fund Selection, Hedge Funds, Fixed Income Portfolio Management,
Equity Portfolio Management, Introduction to Alternative Investments
Get Smart About Investing ■ DNC
Dates May 7–8
M
, July 14–15
D
,
September 17–18
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE 2034
Instructor Greg McGraime
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this two-day, one-of-a-kind course, participants learn practical advice to better
understand investing and make the best possible investment decisions. This program
starts with an overview of investing including: stocks, bonds, mutual funds, annuities,
real estate, and alternative investments. It also covers issues that are very important to
many investors such as investing for retirement and college education and working with
a financial advisor.
With pensions going away, the uncertain future of social security, and important goals
like retirement, college education and buying a home are becoming harder and harder
to reach. Never before has there been more riding on the personal investment decisions
of individuals. By the end of this class participants will improve their understanding of
investing and feel more confident in making investment decisions for their own situation.
Who Should Attend: Newcomers to investing, individual investors, corporate
employees investing for retirement, and others who want a basic understanding of
investing.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Stock Investing for Professionals, Equity Portfolio Management
Global Trader I ■ DNC
Dates September 19
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE 1038
Instructor Janet Wilson
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day simulation will allow participants to review market risks from developing
and implementing a trading strategy in spot foreign exchange markets. They will
measure their trading results against the same performance criteria that are used by
today’s practitioners.
Who Should Attend: Anyone responsible for providing support to trading/sales areas;
Market risk management, audit, financial control, legal, technical support, human
resources.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Investment & Portfolio Management
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 61
Global Trader II ■ DNC
Dates June 2–3
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE2038
Instructor Janet Wilson
Cost $2,375
CPE Credit 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this two-day simulation, participants will build upon their existing knowledge of FX
and money markets. In teams, they will develop and implement an integrated trading
strategy for managing foreign exchange and interest rate risks in a dynamic market.
Participants will measure trading results in spot and forward net exchange positions and
multiple money gaps, using current best market practices.
Who Should Attend: Analysts and associates, traders, brokers, treasury professionals.
Prerequisites: Global Trader I, or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator required.
Global Trader III ■ DNC
Dates June 4–6
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE 3007
Instructor Janet Wilson
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this three-day, intensive simulation, participants will develop and implement an
integrated trading strategy for managing foreign exchange and interest rate risks in a
dynamic market. They will generate trading results in a variety of net exchange positions
and interest rate gaps, using current market practices. Participants will also build their
risk assessment skills in structuring and pricing derivatives solutions to hedge currency
exposure. Using an options pricing model, participants will manage an options portfolio
and develop a practical understanding of how to assess options pricing sensitivities,
stress testing and delta hedging techniques.
Who Should Attend: Relationship managers responsible for structuring and selling
derivatives solutions to manage currency risk; risk managers responsible for measuring,
reporting and managing market risks in options and net exchange positions, including
interest rate gaps; traders and sales professionals with a desire to broaden and deepen
their understanding of foreign exchange and money markets and products; personnel
providing support to any trading/sales area; audit and financial control.
Prerequisites: Global Trader I, Global Trader II or equivalent knowledge. Financial
calculator required
Global Trader IV – Simulation ■ DNC
Dates September 15–18
M
Session 4 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30pm
Level Intermediate / Advanced
Code INVE4000
Instructor Janet Wilson
Cost $3,975
CPE Credit 28.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this intensive simulation, participants explore how treasurers use today’s tools
for measuring, reporting, and managing treasury risks. Through a series of lectures,
proficiency checks, case studies and the simulation, participants learn how to control
interest rate and currency exposures in volatile markets, using a series of off balance
sheet hedging techniques. Topics include:
Evaluation, measurement, reporting, and management of market risks •
Effective hedging of currency and interest rate exposures using off-balance sheet •
products
Developing and implementing successful trading strategies in volatile exchange and •
money markets
Solving typical treasury management problems arising from day-to-day operations •
Who Should Attend: Analysts and associates, traders, brokers, treasury professionals.
Prerequisites: An understanding of the financial markets and products. Financial
calculator required.
Investment & Portfolio Management
62 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Hedge Funds ■ D
Dates January 15
S
, March 5
M
,
May 13
D
, June 5
S
,
August 12
S
, October 8
M
,
December 10
D
, December 16
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE2026
Instructors Lance Eckel & Chris Tidmore
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Hedge funds are one of the fastest growing, yet probably least understood, sectors of the
asset management industry. This course presents a detailed and comprehensive picture
of the hedge funds industry. Topics include:
Hedge funds industry and strategies •
Regulations, registration, and operations •
Evaluation measures of performance •
Considerations for investors •
Issues facing the industry •
Who Should Attend: Employees of funds, family offices, private client financial
service providers, individual investors, and others involved directly or indirectly in the
development, offering, marketing, and investing in hedge funds.
Prerequisites: This program assumes no (or very little) prior knowledge of hedge
funds. While not required, attendees would benefit from having prior basic knowledge
of capital markets and derivatives.
Follow-Up Courses: Introduction to Alternative Investments, Portfolio Management
Suite, Wealth Management Program
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and Management ■ DN
Dates March 4
S
, May 5
D
, July 8
S
,
September 8
M
, November 5
S

Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE 2035
Instructor Jack Foster
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and Management offers an effective framework for
analyzing the risk of any generic or non-generic hedge fund. Participants will develop
long-term perspectives on hedge fund credit risk across different hedge fund profit
strategies and different hedge fund facilities.
Participants will maximize their understanding of hedge fund lending and trading
opportunities within prudent credit practices. The techniques and concepts presented
in this course will be useful in developing a plan for hedge fund credit exposure
measurement and costing policies compatible with the culture of any particular financial
organization.
Who Should Attend: Anyone who audits, reviews, monitors, or extends hedge fund
credit exposure.
Prerequisites: No previous hedge fund experience is required.
Follow-Up Courses: Introduction to Alternative Investments; Derivative Credit Risk
Judgment and Management Course
Introduction to Alternative Investments ■ D
Dates June 4–5
M
, August 13–14
M
,
December 9–10
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE2032
Instructors John Palicka & Lance Eckel
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course offers an introductory look at alternative investments for the individual
investor including real estate, hedge funds, venture capital, private equity, and
commodities. Topics include:
Rationale for the asset classes in terms of risk vs. return and diversification •
Special factors such as liquidity and fund structures •
General valuation techniques •
Who Should Attend: Financial analysts, individual investors, asset allocators, high-net-
worth managers, specialist and financial planners.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Portfolio Management Suite, Hedge Funds, Structured Products,
Convertible Bonds
Investment & Portfolio Management
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 63
Introduction to Emerging Markets ■ D
Dates June 16
M
, October 13
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE1025
Instructor Jeff Hooke
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day course covers how U.S. companies, equity funds, and commercial lenders
should evaluate potential investment opportunities in the emerging markets of Asia,
Latin America, Eastern Europe, and Africa. These markets have many differences, but
there are business patterns that cross borders and continents, providing a template that
can be applied globally. Topics include:
Opportunities and pitfalls •
Risks and mitigants •
Business, social, and political climates •
Valuation from equity portfolio manager and M&A perspective •
Who Should Attend: Executives from U.S. companies operating company equities
funds and commercial lenders who are considering an entry into the emerging markets.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Investing in Emerging Markets, Fund Selection
Introduction to Private Equity Investments ■ DC
Dates April 10
M
, August 25
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE3005
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this one-day course, students learn the role of private equity investments. Starting
with a basic description of private equity, this course shows the potential rewards and
risks within the context of portfolio theory. In addition to discussing the investment
characteristics, students compare private equity investments to traditional stock
and bond investments. Also, comparisons are made to commodities and real estate
investments. The course also covers key regulatory requirements, marketing issues, and
client reporting practices. Topics include:
Core concepts of private equity •
investments
Suitability requirements for investors •
Appeal of middle market investing •
J-Curve Angst strategies •
Differentiating private equity from •
venture capital and hedge funds
Buyout structure •
Calculating appropriate returns for a •
private equity fund
Key exit strategies of a private equity •
investment
Key reporting measures of a private •
equity fund
Analyzing commodity and real estate •
investments
Who Should Attend: Private equity relationship managers, alternative investment and
private equity portfolio managers, consultants and gatekeepers to asset allocation,
private client financial service providers, individual investors, and others involved
directly or indirectly in the development, offering, marketing, and investing in alternative
investments.
Prerequisites: A background in finance and accounting. Financial calculator (TI BA II
Plus) required.
Follow-Up Courses: Essentials of Corporate Finance, Portfolio Management – Theory &
Practice, Hedge Funds, Fusion Analysis, Stock Investing For Professionals
Investment & Portfolio Management
64 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Investing in Emerging Markets ■ D
Dates May 8–9
M
,
November 13–14
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE1036
Instructor Jorge Martinez Gonzalez
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Globalization trends have lured economic superpowers in a come-and-go fashion
throughout the decades. In current times, there is an upswing in this trend, which allows
portfolio managers to diversify local risks by taking active bets in other developed and
liquid markets. Nevertheless, the financial integration that has accompanied these
globalization trends has also brought about an increase in the correlation of returns
in the key markets of the world. This offers entry to new opportunities and takes some
mandatory steps toward efficient diversification through uncorrelated new markets in
the emerging world. This course illustrates the advantages and obstacles of including
the emerging markets in a portfolio as an asset class of its own. Topics include:
Analytical tools needed to include emerging markets as a new asset class in portfolios •
Benefits and obstacles to emerging markets pose to investors as an asset class •
How to develop a model to diversify a portfolio with emerging markets assets, through •
various available channels
Who Should Attend: Consultants and financial advisors, portfolio managers and risk
managers, corporate treasurers, capital and fixed income markets specialists, hedge
fund managers and strategists.
Prerequisites: A solid knowledge of basic financial and macroeconomic theories and
portfolio management. Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets and Fixed Income Markets I or
equivalent knowledge would be helpful.
Follow-Up Courses: Introduction to Financial Engineering, Global Trader, Hedge Funds,
Fund Selection
Mutual Funds ■ D
Dates June 30–July 1
M
,
November 3–4
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE1032
Instructor Laura Smith Dunaief
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides an understanding of mutual funds, including the uses of open-end
and closed-end funds, the advantages and disadvantages of funds as compared to
individual securities, and how best to select funds that fit an investor’s needs. Topics
include:
How to match investment objectives with the asset allocation decision •
Diversifying fund holdings to optimize risk/reward •
Analyzing and evaluating mutual funds using various analytical and valuation •
techniques
Who Should Attend: Entry-level analysts, institutional salespersons and traders,
aspiring portfolio managers, individual investors.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of the Securities Industry or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Introduction to Alternative Investments, Hedge Funds, Portfolio
Management Suite
Overview of Capital Markets ■ DN
Dates March 24
D
, July 15
M
,
September 8
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE2033
Instructor Laura Smith Dunaief
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Why do capital markets exist? They exist because issuers have needs and investors
seek opportunities. This one-day session will explore the markets for securities where
companies and individuals can go to raise funds and invest funds.
Who Should Attend: Anyone new to the financial services industry, sales people, back
office professionals, staff assistants, auditors, IT professionals.
Prerequisites: None
Investment & Portfolio Management
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 65
Securities Analysis ■ DnC
Dates April 2–3
D
, July 21–22
M
,
September 15–16
M
,
November 5–6
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE1033
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates January 22
M
,
September 9
M

Sessions 10 Evenings
Duration 5:30 pm–8:00 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE2003
Instructor Robert Rossetti
Cost $2,275
CPE Credits 25.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Participants learn how to apply fundamental analysis to stocks and fixed income
securities. Topics include:
Data sources, performance, and earnings forecasting •
Company management evaluation •
Comparisons within an industry sector •
Business cycle and microeconomic factors •
Technical analysis and valuation techniques •
Who Should Attend: Research assistants, sales staff, financial planners, investment
analysts, new portfolio managers, and others involved in investment decisions
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Portfolio Management Suite, Wealth Management Program
Stock Investing for Professionals ■ D
Dates March 24–28
M
,
September 22–26
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE3006
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
During this 5-day course, participants gain both theoretical and practical experience in
the challenges of stock investing. The investment process is very competitive and has
grown more complex for professionals in terms of performance measurement, regulatory
requirements and marketing. As a consequence, this course is essential for people
working in this field or for those seeking careers in asset management. Topics include:
Investment methods •
Reporting results and marketing •
Career paths •
Who Should Attend: Institutional portfolio managers, asset allocation specialists,
high net worth managers, hedge fund managers, stock analysts, fund managers, asset
management consultants and traders.
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of accounting, investments and quantitative methods.
A familiarity with technical analysis and behavioral finance would also be helpful.
Follow-Up Courses: Fusion Analysis, Technical Analysis, Advanced Corporate Finance
Wealth Management Overview ■ D
Dates March 5–6
M
, November 3–4
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE1015
Instructor Bill Coda
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This two-day program covers the big picture of wealth management, beginning with
the client’s point of view on wealth issues: “Grow wealth and protect wealth during my
lifetime and after I’m gone.” Participants learn the components of client profiling, such
as time horizon, risk tolerance, investment preferences, and financial goals. Solutions
examined at a high level include:
Credit for liquidity and leverage •
Asset management including portfolio management, asset allocation, diversification •
and risk/return relationships
Estate and tax planning including fiduciary instruments, trust structures, PICs for off- •
shore clients, and the use of insurance
Who Should Attend: Junior investment advisors, wealth managers new to the industry,
individual investors, support staff in wealth management firms, product specialists
wanting overview of solutions from other areas.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Portfolio Management Suite, Hedge Funds, Introduction to
Alternative Investments, Wealth Management Program
Investment & Portfolio Management
66 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Mergers & Acquisitions: Mergers and acquisitions activity certainly
ebbs and flows. The current upswing in activity in the domestic and global markets proves that strong
conceptual and technical skills are required for anyone working in the field. These courses provide an
understanding of the concepts as well as practical structuring techniques.
Mergers & Acquisitions Suite q DC
Dates March 31–April 4
M
,
December 1–5
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code MANA3000
Instructor NYIF Instructors
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Take the full suite
of courses and
Save $2,125
Taken as a suite, this five-day program provides students with the concepts and theories
of mergers and acquisitions as well as the structuring of a deal through hands-on
examination of the key components of a transaction. In addition, the Free Cash Flow
module covers cash flow drivers, cost of capital, capital budgeting, and acquisition
analysis using free cash flow – all important issues in mergers and acquisitions activity.
The final day covers accounting topics specific to business combinations often excluded
in general financial accounting courses.
Who Should Attend: Financial analysts/managers, bankers, strategic planning
professionals, financial decision-makers in corporations, corporate finance lawyers,
corporate finance accountants, financial management consultants, market regulators,
and professionals interested in the nuts-and-bolts aspects of M&A analysis and
valuation.
Prerequisites: A basic knowledge of financial analysis.
Follow-Up Courses: Financial Modeling
Mergers & Acquisitions: Concepts and Theories q D
Dates March 31–April 1
M
(Suite),
October 13–14
S
(Module Only),
December 1–2
M
(Suite)
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code MANA2005
Instructor NYIF Instructor
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This program provides a comprehensive overview of the major facets of the industry
and the skills engaged in executing transactions. The anatomy of a deal from inception
to post-merger integration is covered. The workshop addresses theories underlying
M&A, domestic and global transactions, as well as key legal and accounting issues. The
program provides executives and professionals with an understanding of basic M&A
principles and analysis grounded in the context of current market dynamics.
Who Should Attend: Financial analysts/managers, bankers, strategic planning
professionals, financial decision-makers in corporations, corporate finance lawyers,
corporate finance accountants, financial management consultants, market regulators,
and professionals interested in the nuts-and-bolts aspects of M&A analysis and
valuation.
Prerequisites: Attendees should have a proficient knowledge of financial analysis and
corporate finance.
Follow-Up Courses: Free Cash Flow, Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions, Financial
Modeling, Mergers & Acquisitions: Structuring the Deal
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 67
Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions q DB
Dates April 2
M
, December 3
M

Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code MANA3005
Instructor Jim Morris
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day intensive course presents an analyst’s approach to accounting for business
combinations. The program’s objectives focus on the application of financial accounting
and federal income tax principles for projecting earnings, accretion/dilution and cash
flows of the post-combination entity. Several of the items discussed are unique to
accounting for business combinations and are typically excluded in other financial
accounting courses. Topics include:
Purchase accounting for business •
combinations including long-term
asset write-ups and write-downs,
goodwill adjustments
LIFO inventories •
Deferred tax items •
Net operating losses •
Forecasting the performance of •
a combined company including
accretion / dilution analysis, synergies,
and cash flow effects
Who Should Attend: Financial analysts/managers, bankers, strategic planning
professionals, financial decision-makers in corporations, corporate finance lawyers,
corporate finance accountants, financial management consultants, market regulators,
and professionals interested in the accounting analysis of M&A transactions.
Prerequisites: A solid understanding of financial accounting and of mergers and
acquisitions concepts and structures.
Follow-Up Courses: Free Cash Flow: A Powerful Decision-Making Metric, Mergers and
Acquisitions: Concepts and Theories, Financial Modeling for Corporate Finance, Mergers
& Acquisitions: Structuring the Deal
Free Cash Flow: A Powerful Decision-Making Metric q DC
Dates February 12
S
(Module Only),
April 3
M
(Suite),
August 12
S
(Module Only),
December 4
M
(Suite),
December 9
S
(Module Only)
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRPF3006
Instructor Richard Malekian
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In today’s business world, it is vital for companies to understand the difference between
net income and free cash flow. This course offers participants the knowledge and ability
to use free cash flow as a business management tool to create value for shareholders.
Participants learn why free cash flow is superior to net income in evaluating business
performance, and how to use this metric to analyze current and future investment
opportunities. Participants learn about the building blocks of free cash flow including net
operating profit after taxes, invested operating capital, and the weighted average cost
of capital. They also learn how to use free cash flow to make capital budgeting decisions
and to quantify the value of acquisition opportunities. This course provides the free cash
flow knowledge and tools that a business professional needs to compete effectively in
an economy that is fast moving, and ever changing.
Who Should Attend: CEOs, VPs of operations, presidents, controllers, CFOs, financial
managers, EVPs of finance, financial analysts.
Prerequisites: A basic understanding of introductory accounting and finance. Financial
calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions, Mergers & Acquisitions:
Concepts and Theories, Financial Modeling for Corporate Finance, Mergers &
Acquisitions: Structuring the Deal
Mergers & Acquisitions: Structuring the Deal q D
Dates April 4
M
(Suite),
October 15
S
(Module Only),
December 5
M
(Suite)
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code MANA2012
Instructor NYIF Instructor
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This two-day workshop provides a practical, hands-on examination of the key components
of M&A transactions. While theoretical concepts are presented and discussed, the
emphasis is on empirical methods of cash flow analysis, cost of capital, valuation, and
financing structures. Excel™ is used during the workshop for quantitative analysis.
Who Should Attend: Financial analysts/managers, bankers, strategic planning
professionals, corporate finance lawyers, corporate finance accountants, financial
management consultants, market regulators and professionals interested in applied
M&A analysis and valuation.
Prerequisites: Participants should have a solid knowledge of financial statement
analysis, the basics of corporate finance, such as TVM, cash flows, and discounting, as
well as Excel™.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions, Free Cash Flow: A Powerful
Decision-Making Metric, Financial Modeling for Corporate Finance
Mergers & Acquisitions
68 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Operations & Compliance: The ability to settle transactions
accurately and efficiently has become crucial. Experienced operations personnel in command of the latest
developments in trade processing and systems enjoy a premium pay scale. New York Institute of Finance
courses offer an understanding of straight through processing, equity and fixed income clearance, foreign
exchange processing, and technology for the financial services industry.
Anti-Money Laundering ■ D
Dates March 17
M
(Module Only),
July 25
M
, (Wealth Mgmt. Program)
October 23
M
(Module Only)
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST1032
Instructor Vincent Primerano /
NYIF Instructor
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course offers an introduction to Anti-Money Laundering with due diligence in
respect to knowing the customer accurately and authentically, and knowing their usual
business and associates coupled with an awareness of any money laundering activities
involving them or their account(s), initially or in the distant future.
This course is a must for all financial managers and employees involved with clients and
client accounts. Case studies are used to practice the concepts. Topics include:
Defining money laundering and examining why money is laundered •
Areas and products most commonly subject to money laundering •
How to know your customer •
Identifying red flags and suspicious activities •
What should be done if you are suspicious •
Forms, terms, and Federal compliance regulations. •
Who Should Attend: All financial services managers and employees involved with
opening and monitoring customer accounts (regardless of type of account), private
banking relationship managers, and employees who process or monitor transactions
either isolated or in customer accounts.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Wealth Management Program
Basel II Credit Risk ■ DC
Dates March 3–5
M
, October 29–31
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code CRED2055
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Basel II is a requirement for many banks. This course provides a comprehensive study of
the credit, market, and operational risk requirements.
Topics include:
Background for and context of the Basel II credit risk requirements •
Data requirements for the key calculations for all of the approaches and for all of the •
main exposure types
Execution of the basic calculations for both the standardized and IRB approaches •
Issues surrounding Pillar 2 and Pillar 3 compliance •
Who Should Attend: Credit and risk officers, business analysts working in Basel II,
compliance officers, finance and technology officers.
Prerequisites: Solid general knowledge of banking products, preferably to include on
and off-balance sheet products and derivatives. Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Measuring and Managing Operational Risk
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 69
Brokerage Operations - Intensive ■ DnB
Dates January 30–31
S
,
February 25–26
D
, May 12–13
M
,
July 23–24
S
, October 27–28
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST1002
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates March 3
D
, June 2
M
,
September 8
D
Sessions 10 Evenings
Duration 5:30 pm–8:00 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST1001
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $2,275
CPE Credits 25.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course is essential for understanding which processes are brought into play
after a trade occurs at a brokerage firm and provides a step-by-step analysis of how
a full service broker-dealer operates. It is equally important to understand the non-
trade related aspects of servicing clients’ accounts and what to be cognizant of in the
protection of the firm from unscrupulous individuals. Topics include:
“Middle office” – where the operation of the market place, types of orders entered, and •
order management processes are explained
“Back office” – where the participants are taken through trade processing routines, •
settlement, client servicing, and “Books and Records”
Brokerage accounting – developing a stock record and trial balance •
Who Should Attend: It should be of particular interest to: technology operational,
technology administrative staff new to the securities industry, broker dealer’s staff with
limited exposure to the entire operations process, brokerage firms’ counter parties at
banks, employees of clearing corporations and depositories, regulatory personnel,
administrative and operational personnel of institutional clients, employees of the
industry’s vendors.
Prerequisites: None
Brokerage Operations for Auditors ■ D
Dates April 14
D
, October 6
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST2007
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day program follows a trade from entry through the stock record, highlighting
areas of potential abuse or non-conformity with rules and procedures. Starting with CIP
violations, telltale signs of inventory parking, late trade reporting and trade jumping,
the program moves on to potential SHO violations, unwarranted stock borrows, mis-
appropriated dividend, interest, and principal pay downs, and concludes with the
misuse of Seg and free stock and other questionable financing activities.
Who Should Attend: New and midlevel regulatory, auditing and compliance personnel
involved with brokerage operations and trade processing or any of its component parts.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3, Compliance for the Securities
Industry
Compliance for the Securities Industry ■ DnB
Dates February 7–8
M
, July 24–25
D
,
November 20–21
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST1031
Instructor William Jannace
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates January 10
M
,
September 4
D
Sessions 10 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST2001
Instructor William Jannace
Cost $2,275
CPE Credits 25.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course provides a thorough examination of the regulatory bodies and regulations
under which the securities industry operates in the United States. The structure and
function of the legal and compliance department of a broker/dealer is examined in light
of this overall regulatory environment. Topics include:
Supervision of customer accounts •
Conditions under which stocks may be sold •
Fraudulent practices and insider information •
Derivatives strategies and transactions •
Who Should Attend: Compliance staff, office managers, attorneys, and auditors.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Finance Essentials for the Professional, Introducing Wall Street,
Global Securities Services Suite
Operations & Compliance
70 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Corporate Treasury Management ■ D
Dates March 10–13
D
,
December 8–11
M
Sessions 4 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code OPST3004
Instructor Ken Parkinson
Cost $3,975
CPE Credits 28.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This four-day, highly practical course offers a thorough grounding in treasury
management tools and techniques. The course enables participants to maximize cash
flows for their organization through effective fund allocation while minimizing risk using
appropriate measurement and management strategies. Topics include:
Role of the corporate treasurer in today’s challenging global economy •
Measurement and management of risk – interest rate, foreign currency, and liquidity •
Effective use of money market and capital market products •
Role of derivative instruments in treasury management, including swaps and credit •
derivatives
Who Should Attend: Corporate treasury executives, FX and money market managers,
CFOs, treasury back office personnel, auditors and accountants, regulators, fund
managers.
Prerequisites: Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets or equivalent knowledge of capital
markets.
Follow-Up Courses: Asset Liability Management
Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3 ■ D
Dates January 22
D
, June 18
M
,
October 7
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code OPST2006
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students examine the Customer Protection Rule, its possession and control
requirements, and the departments involved in compliance with such requirements.
Topics include:
Reserve formula and its rationale and relationship to balance sheet and non-balance •
sheet items
Basic allocation process and its relationship to the stock record •
Who Should Attend: Accounting and compliance staff, operations managers, internal
auditors, and data processing managers.
Prerequisites: Brokerage Accounting or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Brokerage Operations
Debt Instrument Transaction Processing ■ DB
Dates April 16–17
D
, December 8–9
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST1004
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students learn through interactive process exercises and leader-led discussions about
all elements that comprise transaction processing. Topics include:
Product origination •
Middle office concepts and back office settlement •
Procedures •
Record-keeping requirements •
Who Should Attend: Back and middle office staff.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Mortgage Backed Securities, Swaps I, Introducing Wall Street
Derivative Product Transaction Processing ■ DNC
Dates February 27
D
, June 23
M
,
November 17
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code DERV1022
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day program focuses on the processing of transactions emanating from the
fast-growing derivative market. Among the products discussed are: over the counter
options, currency forwards, interest rate swaps, swaptions and credit default swaps. The
program takes the participant from the time the trade is made until it is settled. Along
the way, terminology and forms unique to these products will be explained as to content
and purpose. As these derivatives use different underlying products, the properties of
those products themselves are delved into, including the application of margin and
delivery processes.
Who Should Attend: Back office operational personnel, system developers, regulatory
personnel, industry service organizations personnel
Prerequisites: Brokerage Operations or Fundamentals of the Security Industry.
Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging, Derivative Mathematics,
Derivatives and Financial Statements
Operations & Compliance
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 71
Fundamentals of Corporate Governance ■ DN
Dates TBD
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 a.m. – 4:30 p.m.
Level Intermediate
Code OPST3006
Instructor William Jannace
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Recent regulatory changes, such as the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, have had a
major impact on the way corporations are governed. In this one-day seminar, we
focus on corporate governance issues as well as related items, such as ethics and
financial reporting. Topics include corporate structure and policy statements, including
issues related to a CEO, CFO, and an audit committee; delegation of authority and
responsibilities among boards of directors, officers, and management; fiduciary
responsibilities of the company’s directors, management, and employees; protection for
whistleblowers; the reporting and disclosure requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act;
and the role of the newly created Public Company Accounting Oversight Board
Who Should Attend: Corporate directors and officers, executives, managers,
employees at every corporate level, portfolio managers and people involved in
investment decisions
Prerequisites: None
Global Securities Services Suite q DB
Dates March 17–19
D
,
October 20–22
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST1028
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Take all three days and
Save $575
This program offers a complete overview of processing securities in the global markets.
The execution and settlement of equity, debt, and currency products are examined on
days one and two. Custody, including corporate actions and other custodian services are
examined on day three. Students learn the systems used to transmit trade instructions,
the DR marketplace, securities lending and repo transactions, and trends in exchange
mergers and CSD links. Topics include:
Advantages and disadvantages of execution methods and their effect on settlement •
Roles played by the VMU, CCP, ICSD, CSD, and custodian banks •
Evaluation of operational and settlement risks in processing global transactions •
Identification of markets with special regulations, settlement requirements, and fail •
penalties
Who Should Attend: Settlement, corporate action, and custody staff; IT, program, and
product developers; client service representatives.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Basel II Credit Risk, Brokerage Operations, Customer Protection
Rule 15c3-3, Introduction to Emerging Markets
Global Securities: Trading & Settlements q D
Dates March 17–18
D
,
October 20–21
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST1029
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Participants gain an overview of the global security trade flow and receive a detailed
examination of trading and settlement. Topics include:
Methods of trading used in various countries, followed by settlement procedures used •
in the global marketplace
Examination of the practices used in Brazil, Hong Kong, and the UK, as well as other •
countries chosen by the class
Risk factors and potential execution and settlement problems •
Who Should Attend: Settlement, corporate action, and custody staff; IT, program, and
product developers; client service representatives.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Global Securities: Custody
Operations & Compliance
72 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Global Securities: Custody q D
Dates March 19
D
, October 22
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST1030
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This session examines the services provided by custodians, and looks at the basics
of corporate actions as well as country-specific practices in processing redemptions,
mergers, and rights issues. Topics include:
Dividend and income processing •
Withholding tax policies •
Proxy voting, cash management, and securities lending •
Depositary receipt creation and cancellation •
Who Should Attend: Settlement, corporate action, and custody staff; IT, program and
product developers; client service representatives.
Prerequisites: Global Securities: Trading & Settlements or equivalent knowledge.
Introduction to Net Capital Rule 15c3-1 ■ D
Dates February 20
D
, September 8
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code OPST 1034
Instructor David Weiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day program focuses on both the Standard Method and the Alternate Method
of computing net capital as required by Rule 15c3-1 of the Securities Exchange Act of
1934. The program begins with an explanation of the processes and flows that feed
into the capital computation. In the discussion of the Standard Method, the more
complex of the two component parts such as: minimum capital requirements, allowable
and non-allowable assets, haircuts, aggregate indebtedness, subordinated loans
and tentative net capital are explained as to purpose and process. This section of the
program concludes with the participants performing a capital ratio computation using
the Standard Method. The Alternate Method part of the program includes an overview
of the Customer Protection Rule, 15c3-3, (which is used as the basis for the Alternate
Method), the different application of charges versus the Standard Method and the
regulatory capital requirement. The participants will perform a capital computation using
the Alternative Method at the end of this portion of the program.
Who Should Attend: Individuals responsible for the 15c3-1 computation; Individuals
whose firms use the alternate method and need to understand the complexities of
the standard method; Brokerage firm’s accounting, finance, and regulatory personnel;
Regulatory personnel wanting to understand the origin of the component parts to the
computation; personnel from industry service organizations responsible for monitoring
broker dealer’s capital.
Prerequisites: Participants should have an understanding of cash and security
accounting; Completed the NYIF Brokerage Operations course or equivalent experience.
Follow-Up Courses: Compliance for the Securities Industry; Customer Protection Rule
15c3-3
Overview of Global Securities Services ■ D
Dates February 5
D
, May 1
M
,
October 15
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code OPST1033
Instructor Neale Steiniger
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day program presents an overview of the global security trade flow and the
participants involved in executing, booking, clearing and settling a global transaction.
The program explores the interaction of the participants, their functions, and how they
accomplish their functions, including transmission of instructions and information,
matching trade data and reporting settled and open trades. Topics include:
The role of the participants – issuers, investors, brokers, banks, and clearing and •
settlement facilities
Execution and trade processing •
Clearance – matching and netting functions •
Settlement of securities and funds •
Consequences of failed trades •
Services provided by the custodian bank •
Who Should Attend: Settlement, corporate action, and custody staff, IT, program, and
product developers, client service representatives.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Introducing Wall Street
Operations & Compliance
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 73
Professional Skills: Financial professionals are required to speak, write, negotiate,
sell, and manage effectively. Whether one is presenting ideas in written format or via an oral presentation,
powerful communication skills can get creative ideas and messages across to any audience. Negotiating
skills are necessary for anyone with client contact. New York Institute of Finance now offers an opportunity
to sharpen professional skills. Learn to convey messages in a professional way with Business Writing Skills
and Presentation Excellence: Building Dynamic Business Speaking Skills courses. Learn how to “get to yes”
with New York Institute of Finance’s Negotiation Skills course.
Business Writing Skills ■ DB
Dates January 28
D
, April 21
M
,
October 7
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code PCSK1000
Instructor Laura Smith Dunaief
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Excellent communication skills are a requirement today, regardless of job role. This
course covers writing emails, client pitches, internal memoranda, credit reviews, or
presentations to senior management—all requiring clear and succinct writing skills that
speak to the recipient in the correct professional tone. Topics include:
Role of writing in business •
Organizing the document •
Writing from strength •
Participants’ own writing samples are used throughout the program to demonstrate
different writing techniques.
Who Should Attend: Finance professionals seeking to improve their writing skills.
Prerequisites: Participants must be able to speak and write English with native fluency.
Participants will be required to provide writing samples for analysis two weeks in
advance of the program’s start.
Negotiation Skills ■ D
Dates February 25
M
, June 9
M
,
October 8
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code PCSK1002
Instructor Bill Coda
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group-Live
Method
This one-day workshop increases managers’ and client facing professionals’ influencing
and negotiation skills. It provides a range of skills, tools and techniques that teach
participants how to influence others more powerfully.
The course encourages the creation of a climate of mutual respect and trust in business
relationships through knowing one’s individual values and goals as well as appreciating
others’ differences. The day is based on a series of role-plays and case studies and
participants are expected to contribute actively throughout the program. Participants
learn how to:
Listen and communicate effectively •
Negotiate successfully through planning and managing negotiation opportunities •
Manage conflict •
Broaden their range of negotiating and influencing strategies beyond their personal •
‘comfort zones’
Who Should Attend: Any finance professional who deals with clients or colleagues on
a day-to-day basis.
Prerequisites: None
74 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Presentation Excellence: Building ■ D
Dynamic Business Speaking Skills
Dates April 15
M
, September 15
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code PCSK1001
Instructor William Moran
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In today’s business environment, professionals are called upon to make a variety of
presentations to an ever wider variety of audiences and settings. Each presentation
type has its own needs and special required skills. Presenting requires more than
simply imparting information to the audience. A number of factors distinguish a good
speaker from a mediocre one. This course builds the skills crucial to becoming a good
speaker while presenting important financial information. In this skills-driven training,
the participant receives individual coaching and group feedback. Real, business-based
subject matter serves as the platform for practical sessions. This course provides a
hands-on experience that is immediately applicable to the speaking assignment while
respecting the individual’s professionalism, experience, and individual competencies.
The course features:
Sequence of briefings •
Extensive participant practice and coaching •
On-camera experience •
Private and group review •
Instant feedback to focus on strengths and ways to improve •
Opportunities to measure progress •
Practical and useful self-assessment tools •
A customized, practical guidebook, The Art of Public Speaking, is provided. Each
participant is required to deliver a presentation—of varying lengths—from three to five
times during the course. Each presentation is followed by instructor feedback. The class
is also invited to offer critiques.
Who Should Attend: Professionals from across the organization who need to deliver
presentations in a variety of situations and to different audiences.
Prerequisites: Participants must be able to speak and write English with native fluency.
Professional Skills
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 75
Project Finance: Project Finance involves the raising of funds to finance an
economically separable capital investment project in which the providers of the funds look primarily to
the cash flow from the project as the source of funds to service their loans and provide the return of and a
return on their equity invested in the project.
Essentials of Project and Infrastructure Finance ■ D
Dates May 14–16
M
, July 14–16
D
,
November 5–7
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code PTDF2011
Instructor Jeffrey Hooke
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This is a practical course that provides executives, whether as financiers, sponsors, or
professional support, an opportunity to understand the risk-return character of limited
recourse projects from multiple perspectives. Case studies span a variety of sectors and
geographical regions.
Participants learn to:
Distinguish between limited recourse project financing and alternative funding •
strategies
Clarify the objectives of transaction participants and alternative methods for •
evaluating projects
Identify legal, operational, and financial risks presented by the project, with reference •
to illustrative case studies
Evaluate robustness with which a transaction structure addresses these risks, with •
reference to the term sheet
Evaluate financial strength of the project in a cash flow framework, with reference to a •
model built by the delegates themselves
Identify issues involved in enforcement of rights in cross-border circumstances •
Who Should Attend: Finance professionals involved in developing opportunities
in project finance; other banking personnel dealing with documentation or financial
analysis of transactions; engineering and treasury staff at construction or equipment
supply companies; government officials involved in procurement and negotiations
with private sector infrastructure providers; lawyers involved in documenting limited
recourse transactions; consultants and advisors providing support for proposed
transactions; and anyone wanting to have a deeper understanding of the intricacies of
project finance.
Prerequisites: Foundation in Excel™.
76 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Risk Management: The acknowledgement that risk exists in all investments is the
first step to financial wisdom. A big second step is understanding that although risk cannot be eliminated,
it can be reduced through proper management. These courses give a solid grounding in risk analysis,
assessment, and management.
Risk Management Suite q D
Dates January 28–February 1
M
,
February 11–15
S
, June 16–20
M
,
August 4–8
S
, October 27–31
M
,
December 15–19
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code RISK1007
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This comprehensive five-day course surveys the broad area of financial risk
management. Using examples drawn from the major financial markets as well as
exercises and case studies, students learn how to measure and manage the different
types of risks. Topics include:
Evolution of financial risk management •
Financial risk management •
Various types of risk •
Using derivatives in risk management •
Who Should Attend: Risk managers and assistants, trading assistants, finance
professionals, auditors, and controllers.
Prerequisites: None
Save $1,550 when you attend all five days
Introduction to Financial Risk Management q D
Dates January 28
M
, February 11
S
,
June 16
M
, August 4
S
,
October 27
M
, December 15
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code RISK1004
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course examines the evolution of financial risk, and the need for risk management,
as well as an overview of the various types of risk and risk management instruments.
Topics include:
Forwards •
Futures •
Swaps •
Options •
Exotics and other structures •
Who Should Attend: Risk managers and assistants, trading assistants, finance
professionals, auditors and controllers.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives, Credit Derivatives
Risk Management for the Debt & Equity Markets q D
Dates January 29–30
M
,
February 12–13
S
, June 17-18
M
,
August 5–6
S
,October 28–29
M
,
December 16–17
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code RISK1005
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Participants learn to measure and manage financial risk, including interest rate and yield
curve risks. The course covers the traditional approaches to managing risk, as well as the
use of derivatives in risk management. Topics include:
Asset liability management •
Value at risk •
Equity risk •
Who Should Attend: Risk managers and assistants, trading assistants, finance
professionals, auditors, and controllers.
Prerequisites: Introduction to Financial Risk Management or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Derivatives, Equity Derivatives
Risk Management of Derivatives q D
Dates January 31–February 1
M
,
February 14–15
S
, June 19–20
M
,
August 7–8
S
, October 30–31
M
,
December 18–19
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code RISK1006
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students learn to manage the risk of derivatives. Topics include:
Greeks, Delta and Gamma, and other •
derivative instruments
Use of credit derivatives •
Micro hedging •
Macro hedging •
Credit swaps •
Total return swaps •
Credit spread options •
Who Should Attend: Risk managers and assistants, trading assistants, finance
professionals, auditors, and controllers.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Derivatives or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Derivatives, Equity Derivatives, Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 77
Asset Liability Management ■ D
Dates January 15–16
S
, April 21–22
M
,
May 6–7
S
, July 30-31
M
,
September 9–10
S
,
November 12–13
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code RISK1002
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This two-day program focuses on the traditional, as well as the ever-changing, landscape
of asset liability management (ALM).. The traditional methods of identifying, measuring,
and managing risk are reviewed, and up-to-date developments in risk measurement are
explored, with emphasis on the management and control of risk in financial institutions
and how the ALM process integrates with the overall strategy of the firm. The goals,
different risks, and overall financial structure of the firm are also discussed. Topics
include:
Gapping, net interest income, risk measurements •
Mortgage-backed securities (MBS) and managing an MBS portfolio •
Who Should Attend: Risk managers and analysts, treasurers, pension fund managers,
auditors, controllers, regulators, legal and compliance staff.
Prerequisites: Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets or equivalent knowledge of capital
markets.
Follow-Up Courses: Risk Management Suite, Credit Portfolio Risk Management
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and Management ■ DN
Dates April 8–10
S
, March 12–14
M
,
August 25–27
D
,
October 14–16
S
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV 2060
Instructor Jack Foster
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and Management offers an overview of how to analyze
cash flows for a single transaction, aggregate cash flows for all derivative products,
ascertain peak credit exposures, determine accurate derivative credit costs, contrast
derivative trading with derivative credit risk, and achieve consensus among traders and
credit officers as they develop policies and systems to govern derivative transactions.
The concepts and techniques offered in this course are useful not only for identifying
derivative credit risk within a counterparty’s overall credit risk, but also for refining credit
policies. The course outlines steps for gradually implementing increasingly sophisticated
techniques for measuring, costing, and managing derivative exposure.
Who Should Attend: Credit officers, credit administrators, and derivative sales
personnel, and traders.
Prerequisites: No previous derivative experience is required
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Portfolio Risk Management; Hedge Fund Credit Risk
Judgment and Management; Credit Default Swaps: From Vanilla to Exotic
Fundamentals of Credit Risk Identification & Management ■ DN
Dates January 23–24
M
, April 17–18
D
,
October 16–17
M
,
December 8–9
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code RISK1012
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this two-day course, participants are introduced to the origins, nature, and types of
credit risk structures that are typically encountered in financial markets. Beginning with
the identification and definition of credit risk, the course surveys the methods that have
been used to quantify and measure credit risks. In addition, the course explores the
fundamentals of risk management in general, and of credit risk in particular. The role
of the Basel Accord in credit risk analysis and management is examined. Throughout,
emphasis is on a broad understanding of this area of financial risk management. Topics
include:
Framework of risk management •
Distinguishing characteristics of credit risk •
Scope and complexity of credit risk •
Who Should Attend: Anyone who wishes to transition into credit risk management.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of the Securities Industry or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis, Demystifying Cash Flow
Risk Management
78 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and Management ■ DN
Dates March 4
S
, May 5
D
July 8
S
, September 8
M
,
November 5
S
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE 2035
Instructor Jack Foster
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and Management course offers an effective framework
for analyzing the risk of any generic or non-generic hedge fund. Participants will develop
long-term perspectives on hedge fund credit risk across different hedge fund profit
strategies and different hedge fund facilities.
Participants will maximize their understanding of hedge fund lending and trading
opportunities within prudent credit practices. The techniques and concepts presented
in this course will be useful in developing a plan for hedge fund credit exposure
measurement and costing policies compatible with the culture of any particular financial
organization.
Who Should Attend: Anyone who audits, reviews, monitors, or extends hedge fund
credit exposure.
Prerequisites: No previous hedge fund experience is required.
Follow-Up Courses: Introduction to Alternative Investments; Derivative Credit Risk
Judgment and Management Course
Introduction to Operational Risk ■ D
Dates February 4
D
, June 11
M
,
November 17
D
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–5:00 pm
Level Introductory
Code RISK1008
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course introduces the basic concepts of operational risk and operational risk
management (ORM). It traces the evolution of ORM, identifies the challenges of
measuring and managing operational risk and explores the benefits of ORM as a
component of enterprise risk management (ERM). Topics include:
Sources of operational risk •
Impact on the firm •
Legal, regulatory, and business drivers •
ORM framework, policies, and procedures •
History of the Basel accords and ORM •
Who Should Attend: Computers and information systems personnel, back office
personnel, risk managers, risk managers assistants, trading assistants, and finance
professionals.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Portfolio Risk Management
Managing Catastrophic Risks ■ D
Dates March 6–7
M
,
November 12–13
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code RISK1011
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Financial professionals have long been focused on credit and market risk. Yet recent
tragic events such as hurricanes in the U.S. and terrorist attacks globally have begun
to focus executives and risk managers on the management of catastrophic risks. This
course explores the identification, measurement, control, and monitoring of catastrophic
risks at financial institutions. The intertwined nature of catastrophic risks and their
impact on credit, market, and operational risk is explored. The focus is also on insurance,
data collection, and backup, and other key factors that mitigate business disruptions.
Topics include:
Role of regulators such as the BIS, central banks, and public/private partnerships •
working on mitigating the impact of catastrophic risks
Case studies and articles about the impact of catastrophic risks on financial •
institutions
Who Should Attend: Risk managers, operational risk personnel, compliance and legal
personnel.
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of risk management, credit risk, market risk, and
operational risk.
Follow-Up Courses: Derivatives Suite, Value at Risk, Risk Management Suite
Risk Management
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 79
Market Risk for OTC Products ■ D
Dates March 12–14
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code DERV2058
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this course, students learn to identify, measure, control, and monitor market risks,
especially interest and foreign exchange risks. This course combines the perspective
of market participants as well as central bank regulators. Exercises and case studies
focusing on U.S. and international financial institutions complement lectures and
reading assignments. Topics include:
Risk management process •
Importance of risk-based supervision (RBS) and distinguishing RBS from compliance- •
based supervision
Significance of market risk as a component of risk management and the increasing •
importance of supervision of market risk
Basic measures of market risk and their impact •
Interest rate risk •
Monitoring and controlling interest rate risk •
Interest rate risk examination procedures •
Factors that influence the foreign exchange market •
Foreign exchange mechanics and conventions •
FX risk •
Controlling and monitoring FX risk •
FX risk examination and auditing procedures •
Who Should Attend: Front, middle, and back office personnel, IT professionals,
regulators, auditors, and compliance, management consultants, financial journalists.
Prerequisites: A solid knowledge of macroeconomics.
Follow-Up Courses: Derivative Products I & II, Value at Risk
Measuring & Managing Operational Risk: Basel II Compliance ■ DB
Dates June 11–13
M
, October 20–22
M

Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code RISK3000
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Analysis and reduction of operational risk in financial institutions has often taken a back-
seat, yet recent bank defaults and corporate scandals have shown the devastating effect
poor operational risk management can bring. This three-day program enables delegates
to identify and manage operational risk while complying with Basel II. Participants leave
the course with effective tools to develop effective internal control mechanisms and
reduce and avoid enterprise-wide operational risk management. Topics include:
Operational risk •
Quantitative & qualitative methods for effectively measuring operational risk •
Examining risk models •
Implementing appropriate IT solutions to reduce risk •
Understanding Basel II—regulatory guidelines and impact for financial institutions •
Implementing best practices to comply with Basel II •
Who Should Attend: Operations management staff, IT executives, operational risk
managers, back office managers, settlement officers, internal auditors, risk auditors.
Prerequisites: Introduction to Operational Risk or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Credit Risk Analysis
Performance Measurement ■ D
Dates April 24–25
M
,
November 18–19
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE1016
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students explore the fundamental concepts underlying performance measurement,
including a brief introduction to essential statistical concepts. Focus is on the
characteristics of different domestic and international style indexes and more recent
style analysis. Topics include:
Asset allocation •
Benchmarking •
Style analysis •
Who Should Attend: Plan sponsors, consultants, wealth advisors and money
managers.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Probability and Statistics for the Finance Professional
Risk Management
80 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Risk Management for Insurance Companies ■ D
Dates June 9–10
M
, October 27–28
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code RISK1010
Instructor Mayra Rodriguez Valladares
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course examines the demographic changes and recent calamities such as
Hurricanes Katrina and Rita, and the avian flu, that have forced insurance companies
to focus not only on what products they offer, but also how to improve their asset
and liability management, along with their risk management processes and systems.
Focus is on the insurance sector and participants learn the process by which insurance
companies identify measure, monitor, and control their risks. Topics include:
OTC and exchange traded derivatives •
Insurance-linked instruments including property catastrophe bonds, securities funding •
life insurance reserves, insurance risk swaps, and industry loss warranties (ILWs)
Who Should Attend: Insurance company risk managers, finance risk professionals,
auditors.
Prerequisites: A basic understanding of the insurance industry.
Follow-Up Courses: Risk Management Suite, Derivatives in Energy Markets
Value at Risk ■ D
Dates April 29–30
M
, July 28–29
M
,
November 10–11
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE1007
Instructor Joseph Onochie
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course establishes the building blocks of risk management: risk, return, normal
distribution, correlation, and volatility; and features practical, hands-on exercises and
examples. Topics include:
Variance-Covariance •
Historical and Monte Carlo simulation •
Measurement of VaR and how it is used in a practical environment •
Who Should Attend: Risk managers and analysts, treasurers, pension fund managers,
auditors, controllers, regulators, legal and compliance staff.
Prerequisites: Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets or equivalent knowledge of capital
markets.
Follow-Up Courses: Risk Management Suite
Risk Management
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 81
Structured Products: Structured products make up part of the $24 trillion fixed
income markets. Structured products are synthetic investment instruments specially created to meet the
needs that cannot be met from the cash financial instruments available in the marketplace. Structured
products can be used as an alternative to a direct investment or as part of the asset allocation process to
reduce risk exposure of a portfolio. The FDIC says, “Structured finance transactions encompass a broad
array of products with varying levels of complexity. Structured products typically result in a final product
that is often nonstandard and is structured to meet the specific financial objectives of a customer.”
They often involve professionals from multiple disciplines within financial institutions and may have
significant fees or high returns in relation to the market as well as credit risks associated with the
transaction. They may be associated with the creation or use of one or more special purpose entities
(SPEs) designed to address the economic, legal, tax or accounting objectives of the customer and/or the
combination of cash and derivative products. Finally, and perhaps most important, they may expose the
financial institution to elevated levels of market, credit, operational, legal or reputation risks. The New
York Institute of Finance courses provide insights into this exciting and growing area of finance.
Financial Management of Structured Products ■ D
Dates May 1–2
M
, October 13–14
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code STRM 3004
Instructor Gim Seow
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The course provides a detailed overview of the financial management of structured
product transactions. The parameters of structured product deals will be explored. Due
to the elevated levels of market and operational risk, the course creates guidelines for
the assessment framework needed to manage risk. In addition, the course incorporates
a discussion of FASB rules regarding accounting for variable interest entities, accounting
for warehouses, and Basel II guidelines for regulatory capital requirements.
Who Should Attend: Securitization market practitioners, portfolio risk managers,
corporate financiers, treasurers, credit risk managers, traders.
Prerequisites: A basic knowledge of derivatives and capital markets.
Follow-Up Courses: Structured Credit Modeling, Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging
Structured Products Suite q D
Dates April 14–18
M
,
September 8–12
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code STRM3003
Instructor NYIF Instructors
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 28.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Save $975
Attend all five days
This four-day program provides the concepts and theories, and risks and regulations of
the different asset types and market sectors along with a hands-on modeling session on
valuation structuring and pricing. Case studies are used to demonstrate techniques and
methods. Topics include:
Asset-side analysis •
Liability-side analysis •
CDO modeling •
Reverse-engineer analysis •
Who Should Attend: Sales staff, traders, financial analysts, securitization market
practitioners, portfolio risk managers, corporate financiers, treasurers, credit risk
managers, and anyone who must value, evaluate, or analyze CDOs.
Prerequisites: A solid knowledge of Excel™ & Windows™ and a fundamental
understanding of structured finance.
82 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Overview of Structured Products q D
Dates February 6–7
S
(Module Only),
April 14–15
M
(Suite),
July 15-16
S
(Module Only),
September 8–9
M
(Suite),
December 2-3
S
(Module Only)
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code STRM1000
Instructors Manan Rawal / NYIF Instructor
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Structured products are the largest and fastest growing segment of the fixed income
market. This class provides an overview of structured products from the points of view
of the issuer and the investor. This class discusses the advantages issuers receive from
creating structured deals as well as the advantages investors can receive from investing
in securities. Topics include:
Need for structured products •
Forms of structured products and underlying assets/collateral •
Valuation •
Future opportunities •
Who Should Attend: Sales staff, traders, financial analysts, securitization market
practitioners, portfolio risk managers, corporate financiers, treasurers, credit risk
managers.
Prerequisites: Basic understanding of financial market asset.
Structured Credit Modeling q D
Dates April 16–18
M
,
September 10–12
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code STRM3000
Instructor Jan Ericsson
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This is a methodological course on the analysis of credit risk for single-name and multi-
name credit products. The focus lies on quantitative models for assessing the value and
risk of products like corporate bonds, credit default swaps and more complex portfolio
products including various types of Collateralized Debt Obligations (CDOs). The course
will develop the models, and whenever possible, discuss the empirical evidence and
experience on the performance of these models. The course is delivered using lectures
and computer labs based on examples in Excel™.
Who Should Attend: The course is intended for professionals whose work exposes
them to issues related to firm-specific and portfolio credit risk. Among those who will
benefit from the course are practitioners working as quantitative analysts, derivative
researchers and traders, credit risk managers, and credit analysts and researchers.
Prerequisites: Some knowledge of derivatives theory.
Structured Products
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 83
Technical Analysis: Volatile trading markets have focused more interest than
ever on technical analysis. The concepts can be applied to any market: equities, fixed income, currencies,
futures, or options—domestic or global. As with all New York Institute of Finance courses, some of Wall
Street’s top practitioners will be the instructors who sort out the mysteries of the Elliott Wave theory,
candlesticks, charts, oscillators, and many other elements of technical analysis.
Advanced Technical Analysis Workshop ■ nB
Dates February 25
M
, October 13
M
Sessions 4 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Advanced
Code TECH3001
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $1,575
CPE Credits 10.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course is for technical analysts who have moved beyond the beginning stages of the
discipline, and need to focus more on strategies and case analysis. This is the perfect
follow-up course for Technical Analysis. This course deals with the major chart patterns,
using various technical tools with emphasis on turning points, continuation patterns,
and important market decision points to reach buy/sell decisions.
The course deals with measuring momentum indicators that are used by many
technicians. Indicators include tools such as Moving Averages. They are discussed in
terms of both price and volume measurement. Both long and short-term cycles are
examined, including Elliott Wave Theory. Portfolio management techniques in technical
analysis are covered, including candlesticks, derivatives and other risk management
tools. The course also explores sentiment, including various fear and greed indicators.
The course also discusses other markets such as international, real estate, and art,
in addition to the eclectic tools of technical analysis and their applications to other
markets. Topics include:
Intermarket analysis •
Short-term trading strategies •
Quantitative and artificial intelligence modeling •
Who Should Attend: Portfolio managers, traders (especially principal traders),
academics wishing to expand their knowledge in investing and to those preparing for
the CMT Level 1 and 2 exams.
Prerequisites: Technical Analysis or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Fusion Analysis Suite
CMT Exam Preparation / Technical Analysis ■ DB
Dates July 9–10
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code TECH4000
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This comprehensive program is designed to prepare students for the Level I Chartered
Market Technicians (CMT) exam, which is the professional accreditation developed by
the Market Technicians Association (MTA) for Technical Analysts. Through methods of
charting, candidates learn trends and momentum and the basics of indicators used to
technically analyze the bond, commodity, currency, equity, futures, and options markets.
The course also explores ethical and professional standards. Topics include:
Chart pattern interpretations •
Momentum •
Relative strength •
Volume techniques •
Sentiment analysis •
Intermarket analysis •
Special technical analyses in areas such as: •
Point and Figure -
Gann -
Elliott Wave -
Cycle Analysis -
Japanese Candlesticks -
Who Should Attend: Securities dealers, financial advisors, financial planners, financial
investment analysts, and individuals interested in trading and the financial markets.
Prerequisites: None
84 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Essentials of Fusion Analysis ■ nB
Dates January 24–February 4
M
,
June 3–24
D
, September 8–18
M
Sessions 4 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Advanced
Code TECH3002
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $1,575
CPE Credits 10.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
An increasing number of portfolio managers have realized that fundamental analysis
alone often does not make the best investment approach. They have increasingly
included the benefits of technical analysis. Also, the volatile trading markets have
focused increasing attention on the proper blend of fundamental and technical analysis
for a broad array of investors with various time horizons. Some call this new popular
trend “fusion analysis”. This workshop reviews some of the basic tools of fundamental
and technical analysis. It is geared mostly to the equity investor, but covers some other
asset classes such as fixed income and commodities. It then blends the best of both
approaches to a successful investment strategy. This course stresses three bodies of
knowledge:
Major tools of technical analysis •
Major tools of fundamental analysis •
Generating quant stocks screens that provide promising stock ideas •
Who Should Attend: Portfolio managers, traders, academics wishing to expand their
investing knowledge.
Prerequisites: Technical Analysis or equivalent knowledge and a basic understanding
of finance.
Fusion Analysis ■ DB
Dates March 17–18
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code TECH3003
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This intensive two-day course reviews some of the basic principles of Fusion Analysis,
using case studies and supplemental readings. Focusing mostly on U.S. equities,
participants use Fusion Analysis to generate quant stock screens that can provide good
investment opportunities. Fixed income, currencies, and alternative investments, such
as, real estate and commodities are also covered. Topics include:
Bubbles, panics, and market predestination concepts •
Biases in fiscal and monetary policies •
Real estate bubble analysis using appraisals. •
NOI, cash flows, financing techniques, Elliott Wave analysis, consumer actions, and •
lending practices
Market cycles, such as Kitchen, Kondratieff, and Presidential •
Elliott Wave, Gann, Japanese candlesticks, and Point and Figure •
Quant screens/artificial intelligence techniques and specialized behavioral finance •
tools
Trading techniques: day, swing, algorithmic, hyper, pair, spread, neuro-science •
Human versus the machine, Godel-Turing considerations •
Screening methods with specific fusion factors for security selection •
Trading and derivative strategies •
Who Should Attend: Hedge funds professionals, asset allocation specialist, alternative
investment managers, portfolio managers, traders, investment analysts.
Prerequisites: A good understanding of both fundamental and technical concepts. A
background in derivatives would also be useful.
Technical Analysis
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 85
Technical Analysis ■ DB
Dates January 24–25
M
, June 21–22
M
,
September 11–12
M
,
November 6–7
D
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code TECH2002
Instructor Cornelius Lucas / John Palicka
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This class focuses on both traditional technical tools such as chart patterns, momentum,
sentiment, and volume along with more exotic approaches such as Elliott Wave, Gann,
and Candlesticks. Students learn to choose among these and other key technical
approaches to produce the most productive trades, given various investment horizons.
Topics include:
Normal absolute return goals •
Spread, algorithm, and intermarket strategies •
Use of derivatives in technical analysis decisions, especially using Greek option •
strategies
Introduction to quantitative analysis and artificial intelligence approaches in technical •
analysis
Recent issues in behavioral finance •
Who Should Attend: Portfolio managers, traders (especially principal traders),
academics wishing to expand their knowledge in behavioral finance.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Technical Analysis, Fusion Analysis Suite
Technical Analysis 101 with Ralph Acampora ■ nB
Dates March 17
D
, September 8
D
Sessions 10 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code TECH1004
Instructor Ralph Acampora
Cost $2,275
CPE Credits 25.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Technical analysis offers a professional understanding of how to chart the stock market.
Students develop an excellent foundation in each type of tool and the various technical
theories. This course teaches risk management to traders and investors. Topics include:
Use of charts and technical indicators in a clear, simple, and concise manner to better •
place trade entries and exits
Steps to create high probability trades using charts, trendlines, support and resistance •
levels
How to combine steps to form a clear picture of price, time, volume, and market •
expectations
Who Should Attend: Portfolio managers, traders (especially principal traders),
academics wishing to expand their knowledge in behavioral finance.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Advanced Technical Analysis, Fusion Analysis Suite
Technical Analysis
86 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Technical Analysis – Principles and Theories q DN
Dates February 25–29
S
,
April 21–25
M
,
December 1–5
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code SPEC4000
Instructor Ralph Acampora
Cost $4,675
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This five-day program is an intensive introduction to technical analysis and its use as
an integral part of market analysis. Methodologies for construction and interpretation
of bar charts, point and figure charts, and candlestick charts are covered in depth. You
will learn how to best use and interpret results from software and subscription products
that automate and facilitate certain aspects of technical analysis. All supplemented with
assigned outside readings from textbooks that NYIF will provide.
Week One – Topics include:
Constructing and interpreting charts •
Four phases of price and activity •
Pattern recognition of bar, chart, point, •
figure and candlestick charting
Technical theories and indicators •
Intermarket analysis •
Students will be able to:
Construct four types of charts •
Identify trends and important •
price points
Recognize patterns •
Use technical indicators •
Apply technical theories •
Use electronic tools to facilitate •
analysis
Who Should Attend: Traders, portfolio managers, analysts, financial planners, brokers,
individual investors, and anyone making or influencing decisions as to when to buy or
sell securities.
Prerequisites: An undergraduate degree or equivalent. Fluency in English.
Follow-Up Courses: Technical Analysis – Advanced Technical Analysis/Real Time Usage
– Suite, CMT Preparatory Classes, and Fusion Analysis
Advanced Technical Analysis/Real Time Usage – Suite q DN
Dates March 3–7
S
, April 28–May 2
M
,
December 8–12
M
Sessions 5 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code SPEC5000
Instructor Ralph Acampora
Cost $7, 000
CPE Credits 36.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This five-day program is an intensive continuation of the “Principles and Theories”
program. You will examine the top-down approach to external and internal indicators
and undertake an in-depth analysis of U.S. and foreign equity markets, U.S. Treasurys,
currencies, and commodities. Emphasis will be placed on the use of software in creating
and interpreting charts. An examination will be held at the end of the week. You will
receive a certificate upon receiving a 70% or better grade.
Students will be able to: In the final examination on Day 5, the students will create their
own market forecast, including external and internal indicators, along with intermarket
analysis and style strategy— culminating with five buy and five sell recommendations.
Week Two – Topics include:
U.S. equity markets and major indexes •
– top-down approach to internal and
external indicators
Intermarket analysis – fixed income, •
commodities, currencies and foreign
equity markets
Style strategy sector analysis •
and group analysis
Top-down analysis of mid-cap groups, •
small-cap groups
Bottom-up approach of stock picking •
on a technical basis
Who Should Attend: Traders, portfolio managers, analysts, financial planners, brokers,
individual investors, and anyone making or influencing decisions as to when to buy or
sell securities.
Prerequisites: Technical Analysis - Basic Principles and Theories program.
Follow-Up Courses: CMT Preparatory Classes, Fusion Analysis
Technical Analysis
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 87
Trading: Professionals know that successful trading is a demanding principle that requires
highly specialized skills and knowledge. These courses enable traders to develop trading tactics based on
well-tested professional models.
Bond Trading ■ D
Dates March 12
D
, September 15
M
,

October 15
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code FIMK1013
Instructor Bill Addiss
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This course examines today’s fixed income markets with a focus on trading and market
tactics. Trade simulations are used to look at optimal trading strategies. Topics include:
Buy/sell executions from posted portfolio •
Investment strategies •
Examination of the relevant rules and regulations that apply to professional traders •
Who Should Attend: Portfolio managers, traders, institutional sales staff, and research
analysts.
Prerequisites: Fixed Income Markets I or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Fixed Income Mathematics, Yield Curve Analysis
Equities Trading ■ Dn
Dates June 25–26
M
,
December 17-18
D

Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code TRAD3002
Instructor Adam Shrager / NYIF Instructor
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates March 5
D
, October 22
M
Sessions 8 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Intermediate
Code TRAD1003
Instructor Adam Shrager
Cost $1,975
CPE Credits 20.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Students learn the basics of trading in over-the-counter and listed equity markets. This
course is not only an invaluable introduction to the equities business, but also serves as
a first step to becoming a successful and disciplined trader. Topics include:
Trading fundamentals •
Systems, players, and roles •
Role of options and other hedging vehicles •
Relevant rules and regulations that apply to both investors and professional traders •
Market psychology •
Who Should Attend: Market makers, position traders, day traders, analysts, sales/
trading professionals.
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of the Securities Industry or equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Technical Analysis, Fusion Analysis Suite, Equity Derivatives
Exchange Traded Funds ■ DB
Dates April 30
M
, August 21
D
,
November 14
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE1034
Instructor Vinny Catalano
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this workshop, participants learn the brief history, dynamic future, and specialized
uses of one of the newest and most actively traded financial instruments around:
Exchange Traded Funds (ETFs). The first ETF traded in Toronto in 1989, and today nearly
200 different ETFs in the U.S. alone present a viable alternative investment option to
traditional open-ended mutual funds, especially open-ended index funds.
There are many available ETFs that attempt to track all kinds of indexes (such as
large-cap, mid-cap, small-cap, etc), specialties (such as value and growth), industries,
countries, and even commodities (while commodity funds like Gold Shares are
technically not ETFs, they trade like ETFs). More are continuously being developed. There
are discussions of ETFs for other indexes and commodities, as well as actively managed
ETFs. ETFs are attractive to investors because they offer diversification of mutual funds
with the features of a stock—and offer investors and institutions unique opportunities as
a hedging instrument.
Who Should Attend: Anyone who is interested in mutual funds, trading equities, and
trading strategies.
Prerequisites: A basic knowledge of the nature of an equity (stock) mutual fund.
Follow-Up Courses: Global Trader
88 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Foreign Exchange Marketplace ■ DnBC
Dates March 27–28
D
,
December 11–12
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code FREX1004
Instructor Cornelius Luca
Cost $2,375
CPE Credits 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates May 22
M
, September 25
D
Sessions 6 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Introductory
Code TRAD1006
Instructor Cornelius Luca
Cost $1,775
CPE Credits 15.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This courses focuses on one of today’s most profitable markets —foreign exchange.
Students learn in detail what makes these markets tick and how traders and analysts
make their decisions. Topics include:
Exchange rate determination, trading methods, central bank intervention, hedging, •
and speculating interests
Scope and mechanics of the spot, forwards, swap and futures markets •
Hands-on practice in calculating different forward, swap, and futures prices •
Who Should Attend: New FX traders and investors, foreign exchange staff in
commercial banks, middle office, auditors, securities firms, insurance companies and
corporations, analysts, and junior traders.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Follow-Up Courses: Risk Management Suite, Derivatives Suite
Global Trader I ■ DNC
Dates September 19
M
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code INVE 1038
Instructor Janet Wilson
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This one-day simulation will allow participants to review market risks from developing
and implementing a trading strategy in spot foreign exchange markets. They will
measure their trading results against the same performance criteria that are used by
today’s practitioners.
Who Should Attend: Anyone responsible for providing support to trading/sales areas;
market risk management, audit, financial control, legal, technical support, human
resources.
Prerequisites: Financial calculator required.
Global Trader II ■ DNC
Dates June 2–3
M
Sessions 2 Days
Duration 9:00am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory / Intermediate
Code INVE2038
Instructor Janet Wilson
Cost $2,375
CPE Credit 14.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this two-day simulation, participants will build upon their existing knowledge of FX
and money markets. In teams, they will develop and implement an integrated trading
strategy for managing foreign exchange and interest rate risks in a dynamic market.
Participants will measure trading results in spot and forward net exchange positions and
multiple money gaps, using current best market practices.
Who Should Attend: Analysts and associates, traders, brokers, treasury professionals.
Prerequisites: Global Trader I or equivalent knowledge. Financial calculator required.
Global Trader III ■ DNC
Dates June 4–6
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code INVE 3007
Instructor Janet Wilson
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this three-day, intensive simulation, participants will develop and implement an
integrated trading strategy for managing foreign exchange and interest rate risks in a
dynamic market. They will generate trading results in a variety of net exchange positions
and interest rate gaps, using current market practices. Participants will also build their
risk assessment skills in structuring and pricing derivatives solutions to hedge currency
exposure. Using an options pricing model, participants will manage an options portfolio
and develop a practical understanding of how to assess options pricing sensitivities,
stress testing, and delta hedging techniques.
Who Should Attend: Relationship managers responsible for structuring and selling
derivatives solutions to manage currency risk; risk managers responsible for measuring,
reporting, and managing market risks in options and net exchange positions, including
interest rate gaps; traders and sales professionals with a desire to broaden and deepen
their understanding of foreign exchange and money markets and products; personnel
providing support to any trading/sales area; audit and financial control personnel.
Prerequisites: Global Trader I, Global Trader II, or equivalent knowledge. Financial
calculator required
Trading
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 89
Global Trader IV – Simulation ■ DNC
Dates September 15–18
M
Sessions 4 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced / Intermediate
Code INVE4000
Instructor Janet Wilson
Cost $3,975
CPE Credits 28.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
In this intensive simulation, participants explore how treasurers use today’s tools
for measuring, reporting, and managing treasury risks. Through a series of lectures,
proficiency checks, case studies, and the simulation, participants learn how to control
interest rate and currency exposures in volatile markets, using a series of off-balance
sheet hedging techniques. Topics include:
Evaluation, measurement, reporting, and management of market risks •
Effective hedging of currency and interest rate exposures using off-balance sheet •
products
Developing and implementing successful trading strategies in volatile exchange and •
money markets
Solving typical treasury management problems arising from day-to-day operations •
Who Should Attend: Analysts and associates, traders, brokers, treasury professionals.
Prerequisites: An understanding of the financial markets and products. Financial
calculator required.
Insider Trading ■ DN
Dates TBD
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 a.m. – 4:30 p.m.
Level Introductory
Code TRAD1010
Instructor William Jannace
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
The course provides a comprehensive overview of insider trading regulation in the
United States. In addition to a thorough discussion of Rule 10B5-1 and Regulation
M, the class also examines use vs. possession issues as well as court decisions and
affirmative defenses. Regulatory surveillance frameworks and current legal trends are
also discussed.
Who Should Attend: Compliance staff, branch office managers, attorneys, auditors,
traders, exchange personnel, and other supervisory staff.
Prerequisites: A basic knowledge of compliance would be helpful.
Introduction to Stealth Trading Using Fusion, Algorithms, ■ D
and Derivatives for Professionals
Dates June 16
Sessions 1 Day
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Intermediate
Code TRAD 3003
Instructor John Palicka
Cost $1,475
CPE Credits 7.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Today, portfolio managers increasingly must use stealth trading to disguise their
intentions and benefit from optimal execution. The old ways of staring at a Bloomberg to
get bid/ask quotes and transacting an order is gradually being supplemented by more
sophisticated strategies to meet various investment goals. The objective of this one-day
course is to give students an introduction to various trading strategies that can achieve
best execution.
The appeal of this course is that it is a bridge to those seeking careers in the new forms
of trading that are replacing the old methods. The trading process is very competitive
and has grown more complex for professionals in terms of execution, regulatory
requirements, and hiding intentions.
Who Should Attend: Traders, institutional portfolio managers, asset allocation
specialists, high-net-worth managers, hedge fund managers, stock analysts, fund
managers, and asset management consultants
Prerequisites: Students are expected to be familiar in basic courses such as
investments, quantitative methods, and derivatives. Familiarity with technical analysis
and behavioral finance will be helpful.
Trading
90 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Options Volatility Trading - Intensive ■ DnB
Dates March 24–26
D
, July 21–23
M
,
November 18–20
D
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Advanced
Code TRAD3001
Instructor McCabe Hurley
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.5
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Dates February 21
M
,
October 13
M
Sessions 8 Evenings
Duration 5:45 pm–8:15 pm
Level Advanced
Code TRAD3000
Instructor McCabe Hurley
Cost $1,975
CPE Credits 15.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
This “real time” options trading course focuses on volatility trading. The class deals
primarily with functioning as a Market Maker/Specialist, but also covers options as
a means of expressing market opinions. The course begins with a notional amount
of capital that the class trades. One portfolio is a volatility trading account, where
participants act as options market makers. The other portfolio trades in a more
speculative nature, using technical and fundamental analysis to make their trading
decisions.
Who Should Attend: Traders, assistant traders, sales professionals, financial analysts,
cash/money managers, auditors, and compliance professionals.
Prerequisites: Basic understanding of technical analysis and fundamental analysis or
equivalent knowledge.
Follow-Up Courses: Technical Analysis, Fusion Analysis
Trading for Non-Traders ■ DN
Dates March 10-12
M
, March 26–28
S
,
June 9-11
D
, September 9–11
S
,
October 13-15
M
Sessions 3 Days
Duration 9:00 am–4:30 pm
Level Introductory
Code TRAD1007
Instructor Tim Scala
Cost $3,275
CPE Credits 21.0
Instructional Group–Live
Method
Trading for Non-Traders is a comprehensive program designed to equip participants with
the tools they need to avoid financial disasters. Operations staff, auditors, attorneys,
regulators, accountants, and others gain exposure to a host of trading-related risk taking
and risk management issues such as market mechanics, financial instruments, and
supporting infrastructure. The course uses realistic trading sessions to give participants
a direct experience in the psychology and momentum of trading through role reversal
techniques. By communicating trading issues to non-traders, the course underscores the
risks of trading, portfolio and investment activities, and the areas that need support and
supervision.
Who Should Attend: Corporate treasurers, treasury support staff, internal-external
auditors, regulators, compliance professionals, financial control staff, middle office staff,
financial service vendors and providers.
Prerequisites: None
Follow-Up Courses: Fundamentals of Derivatives; Technical Analysis, Introducing Wall
Street, Introduction to Financial Accounting, Overview of Capital Markets
Trading
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 91
eLearning Courses: New York Institute of Finance believes that eLearning can
play a valuable role in the total training solution. We have drawn on our extensive experience as trainers
of financial professionals to design courseware that provides a high-quality, electronic learning experience,
covering a variety of topics in the financial industry.
New York Institute of Finance eLearning courses are available 24 hours a day and are designed so you
may learn at your own pace; anytime, anywhere you might access the Internet.
Currently, over 90 Topics providing more than 2,000 hours of online learning are available via the web
and our Learning Management System (LMS). The courses use a combination of text, audio, and animated
graphics to achieve a learning experience that takes advantage of the opportunities inherent in web delivery.
Accounting and Taxes
Budgeting - Online
AATX2080 CPE Credits: 10 Cost: $100
Modern businesses are an epitome of uncertainty and
complexity. Over time, this uncertainty and complexity in
business has led to the development of various managerial
tools, techniques, and procedures useful in managing business
successfully. Of all these, budgeting is the most common and
widely used standard device for planning and control. This
course provides fundamental understanding of budgeting, the
budgeting process, and includes a practical guide for preparing
and mastering financial budgets.
Financial Accounting - Online
AATX2061 CPE Credits: 18 Cost: $150
Any organization that deals with money or money’s worth needs
to record every transaction that it enters into. This course gives
a complete understanding, right from scratch to preparation and
analysis of financial statements. The course is supplemented
with a number of interactive exercises, in accordance with the
‘learn by doing’ approach.
Management Accounting - Online
AATX1005 CPE Credits: 14 Cost: $150
Financial decisions impact virtually every area of the business.
This course comprises an in-depth coverage of two crucial
areas of every business: management of current assets and
management of working capital. It presents the principles
and techniques of managing each element of current assets
and their financing. Basic theories and important formulae
are also discussed. As any theory can be best understood by
its application, this course take a step-by-step approach to
solving problems by using the learn by doing policy. Therefore,
the course explores the theory with relevance to the real-
world business problems through the analytical approach. It is
intended to familiarize you with the basic concepts and to apply
the same in practice at intermediate and advanced level.
Exam Prep
ePRM Coach - Online
EXAM4010 Cost: $500
ePRM Coach is a comprehensive online tutorial, designed in
accordance with the structure of the Professional Risk Manager
(PRM) program, offered by the Professional Risk Managers’
International Association (PRMIA).
The Professional Risk Managers (PRM) Certification Program is a
competitive exam that tests a professional’s competence in the
field of risk management. ePRM Coach is designed in accordance
with the PRMIA exam structure and the prescribed study guide.
The tutorial is equipped with the concepts and practices,
knowledge, and tools to aid application of concepts.
Individual Modules Code Cost
ePRM Coach Finance Theory, Financial
Instruments and Markets
EXAM4006 $150
ePRM Coach Mathematical Foundations EXAM4007 $150
ePRM Coach Risk Management Practices EXAM4008 $150
ePRM Coach: Case Studies, PRMIA Standards
of Best Practice
EXAM4009 $150
eFRM Coach - Online
EXAM4005 Cost: $500
Drawing on proprietary risk management resources, eFRM
Coach is designed to be a comprehensive online tutorial for the
Financial Risk Manager (FRM
®
) Exam. The exam is conducted by
the Global Association of Risk Professionals (GARP™).
The eFRM Coach provides a framework to structured exam
preparation. It comprehensively addresses all subject areas
featuring in the exam. The interactive study modules provided
in the coach foster benchmarking and self-assessment against
other candidates. Mock exams are modeled on the same lines
as the final exam.
Individual Modules Code Cost
eFRM Coach: Quantitative Analysis – Online EXAM4000 $150
eFRM Coach: Market Risk Measurement and
Management – Online
EXAM4001 $150
eFRM Coach: Risk Management and
Investment Management – Online
EXAM4004 $100
eFRM Coach: Operational and Integrated Risk
Management, Legal, Accounting and Ethics –
Online
EXAM4003 $150
eFRM Coach: Credit Risk Measurement and
Management – Online
EXAM4002 $150
92 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
eLearning Courses
93
Core Finance Concepts
Economics for Managers:
Understanding Microeconomics - Online
CSK2004 CPE Credits: 4 Cost: $200
Microeconomics is the study of the economic behavior of
individual consumers, , and industries. This course surveys
the key concepts a manager needs to understand: how the
laws of supply and demand impact producers and consumers;
economic costs and profits; the impact of the government
(taxes, price controls, etc.) on the economy; the question of
competition and its various forms; and production and demand
for resources and labor markets.
Economics for Managers:
Understanding Macroeconomics -
Online
PCSK2003 CPE Credits: 4 Cost: $200
This course discusses the key concepts in macroeconomics
of interest to managers and those in the business world.
Macroeconomics is the study of national economies and the
global economy, how economic aggregates grow and fluctuate,
and the effects of government actions on them. This course
looks at national income, unemployment, and inflation, and
the question of economic growth as well as fiscal and monetary
policy. Further, it considers key issues in international trade.
Equity Markets - Online
CRCN2030 CPE Credits: 20 Cost: $200
A detailed introduction to equity securities, this course covers
the types, characteristics, and risks of common stock, preferred
stock, and other equity-related instruments such as rights,
warrants, and convertible bonds. Each type of security is
presented from the perspective of both investors and issuers.
Financial Mathematics - Online
CRCN2029 CPE Credits: 14 Cost: $150
Financial Mathematics is a building block to learners in the field
of finance. The topics expose the user to fundamental concepts
such as cash flows, present value, future value, yield, and
probability that form the basis for further advanced learning.
Introducing the City - Online
CRCN1013 CPE Credits: 10 Cost: $499
Introducing the City takes participants behind the elegant
facades of the great financial institutions to reveal the City
of London as a major center of global banking and finance.
Introducing the City explores the major financial and banking
players, the products and services these players offer, and the
regulatory environment surrounding the financial markets,
including the new European Union regulations. Finally, the
course compares the London market with its peers in New York,
Frankfurt, and Tokyo.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Financial Centres 1 CRCN1013m1 $60
Regulation in the UK Financial
Services Market
1 CRCN1013m2 $60
Major Players in a Global Financial
Centre
1 CRCN1013m3 $60
Money Markets Around the World 1 CRCN1013m4 $60
Initial Public Offerings in the UK 1 CRCN1013m5 $60
Public Companies in the UK 1 CRCN101m6 $60
Bond Markets Around the World 1 CRCN1013m7 $60
FX and the City 1 CRCN1013m8 $60
Introduction to Derivatives and Risk
Management
1 CRCN1013m9 $60
Insurance and Reinsurance 1 CRCN1013m10 $60
Money Markets - Online
CRCN1046 CPE Credits: 24 Cost: $150
The money markets are wholesale financial markets in which
sovereign states, banks, and major corporations raise funds
through certain types of loans or by issuing debt securities. This
course is designed to teach some of the most common money
market instruments used at financial centers worldwide. The
lessons are structured to provide a complete perspective on the
instruments—from theory to application. The first three lessons
lay down the foundation for the remaining lessons. The other six
lessons deal with instrument-specific minutiae.
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry -
Online
CRCN1017 CPE Credits: 8 Cost: $399
This online version of Fundamentals of the Securities Industry
provides a broad perspective of the workings of Wall Street
and the securities industry. It focuses on the products,
markets, vocabulary, and players, the primary and secondary
markets for securities including investment banking, the stock
exchanges and over-the counter transactions, margin, settling,
clearing, and industry regulations. Essential for newcomers to
the securities industry, this course is also helpful to industry
employees facing increased responsibilities.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to the Securities
Industry
1 CRCN1017m1 $60
Introduction to the Equity Securities 2 CRCN1017m2 $120
Introduction to the Debt Securities 2 CRCN1017m3 $120
Trading Securities in the Secondary
Markets
2 CRCN1017m4 $120
Processing Securities Transactions 1 CRCN1017m5 $60
eLearning Courses
94 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Finance for Non-Financial Managers -
Online
CRCN1012 CPE Credits: 6 Cost: $299
This introductory course provides managers with a basic
understanding of financial management. It demonstrates how
to read and understand key elements of financial statements
and reports, such as balance sheets, income statements, and
cash flow statements. Participants also learn how to apply basic
financial and accounting principles to budget preparation and
analysis.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Financial
Management
1 CRCN1012m1 $60
Key Financial Statements 1 CRCN1012m2 $60
GAAP and Audits 1 CRCN1012m3 $60
Recording Financial Information 1 CRCN1012m4 $60
Budgeting for Nonfinancial
Managers
1 CRCN1012m5 $60
Analyzing and Benchmarking
Financial Information
1 CRCN1012m6 $60
Money & Banking - Online
CRED1002 CPE Credits: 9 Cost: $449
Designed for commercial bankers, financial analysts, and others
who wish to have a basic understanding of money and banking.
This course provides an overview of the fundamental principles
that form the foundation of the money and banking systems
around the world. The course covers monetary bases, the main
instruments of monetary policy and theory, and concludes with
a discussion of the theory and implementation of monetary
policies.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
The Nature of Money 1 CRED1002m1 $60
Measuring Money 1 CRED1002m2 $60
Creating Money 1 CRED1002m3 $60
Creating the Federal Reserve System 1 CRED1002m4 $60
Theory of Monetary Policy 1 CRED1002m5 $60
Implementing Monetary Policy 1 CRED1002m6 $60
International Banking 1 CRED1002m7 $60
Central Bank Structure 1 CRED1002m8 $60
Central Banks Around the World 1 CRED1002m9 $60
Equities - Online
DERV1021 CPE Credits: 7 Cost$349
A detailed introduction to equity securities, this course covers
the types, characteristics, and risks of common stock, preferred
stock, and other equity-related instruments such as rights,
warrants, and convertible bonds. Each type of security is
presented from the perspective of both investors and issuers.
The course also covers equity indexes, index options, and index
mutual funds.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Common Stock 2 DERV1021m1 $120
Preferred Stocks 1 DERV1021m2 $60
Equity-Linked Issues 2 DERV1021m3 $120
Indexes 2 DERV1021m4 $120
Understanding Financial
Statements - Online
CRCN1047 CPE Credits: 4 Cost: $100
Financial statements speak in a nutshell about the financial
affairs of a business organization. This course is intended
to familiarize you with the basic concepts, elements, form,
necessity, and the importance of financial statements.
Corporate Finance
Business Valuation - Online
CRCP1010 CPE Credits: 6 Cost: $299
This course teaches the fundamentals of valuing public and
private companies through a case study approach. It covers the
different methodologies and focuses on the Discounted Cash
Flow (DCF) method as participants build a DCF analysis for an
actual acquisition, using each component of the DCF model:
projected free cash flows, Weighted Average Cost of Capital
(WACC), and terminal value. The course concludes with an
introduction to sensitivity and scenario analysis, which is used
to improve the base case valuation.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Business Valuation 1 CRPF1010m1 $60
The Foundations of Free Cash Flows 1 CRPF1010m2 $60
The Weighted Average Cost of
Capital (WACC)
1 CRPF1010m3 $60
Terminal Value 1 CRPF1010m4 $60
The DCF Approach to Business
Valuation
1 CRPF1010m5 $60
The Limitations of the DCF
Approach
1 CRPF1010m6 $60
Prerequisites: Financial Statement Analysis and Corporate
Finance, or equivalent level of knowledge.
Corporate Finance - Online
CRPF1009 CPE Credits: 5 Cost$249
This newly revised and updated introductory course draws upon
both finance theory and practical applications to help managers
understand key concepts that underlie analysis and execution
of financial decisions. Starting with the objectives of the firm
and its chief financial officer, the course teaches students how
to apply time value of money principles, the capital budgeting
framework, and analysis of financing options when making
financial decisions.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Corporate Finance 1 CRPF1009m1 $60
The Time Value of Money 1 CRPF1009m2 $60
More Time Value Applications 1 CRPF1009m3 $60
Capital Budgeting Overview 1 CRPF1009m4 $60
The Financing Decision 1 CRPF1009m5 $60
eLearning Courses
95
Flotation - Online
CRPF2003 CPE Credits: 4 $100
This course on ‘Flotation’ introduces the basic topics relating
to ‘going public’ - reasons for listing of shares, listing
requirements, contents of prospectus. Then it works through
various methods of initial public offerings (IPOs) and different
factors considered in selection of a flotation method. The course
also focuses on capital market trends in the international arena
and Indian market along with the discussion of various stages
involved in an IPO.
Project Valuation
CRPF2002 CPE Credits: 6 Cost: $100
All organizations, big or small, battle with one constant
constraint—limited resources and unlimited ambitions. The
ever-increasing demand for higher shareholder’s worth
keeps increasing the pressure on these resources, be it
monetary, physical, or intangible assets. This in turn forces the
management to make rational decisions when investing the
resources, leading to the need of valuation of a project. This
course introduces the various methods of project valuations and
their respective pitfalls. It provides an in-depth understanding
of various project valuation techniques with practical examples
of applying these techniques. The course also discusses the
project interaction situations such as capital rationing, mutually
exclusive projects, among others. Finally, it explains how project
analysis is conducted using techniques such as sensitivity
analysis, scenario and break even analysis, and Monte Carlo
simulation.
Mergers & Acquisitions - Online
CRPF1003 CPE Credits: 5 Cost: $249
In Mergers & Acquisitions, New York Institute of Finance offers
participants an introduction to an aspect of business that has
become an inseparable part of today’s increasingly competitive
economic environment. This introductory level course walks
students step-by-step through the M&A process. The course
identifies the types of corporations most likely to be M&A
players and the types of corporations most likely to be M&A
targets. Participants learn how to calculate potential risks and
returns before taking the M&A leap; determine an acquisition
candidate’s value; weigh the various financing options; develop
an exit strategy; and deal with the people and systems in the
newly acquired company.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Overview of Mergers & Acquisitions 1 CRPF1003m1 $60
Risk Considerations for Mergers &
Acquitisions
1 CRPF1003m2 $60
Valuing the Acquisition Candidate 1 CRPF1003m3 $60
Financing the Acquisition 1 CRPF1003m4 $60
Integrating the Acquisition 1 CRPF1003m5 $60
Prerequisites: Financial Statement Analysis or equivalent
knowledge.
Credit Risk
Corporate Credit Analysis - Online
CRED1004 CPE Credits: 5 Cost: $249
Corporate Credit Analysis takes a diagnostic approach—it
teaches participants what to look for when assessing the
financial health of a corporation. Participants explore the
implications of financial and non-financial credit and business
risks on corporate credit. They learn how to structure a loan
and the best methods for monitoring and standardizing credit
control procedures. At every stage of the course, students are
asked to apply credit analysis theories to practical case studies
drawn from different countries and industrial sectors.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Corporate Credit
Analysis
1 CRED1004m1 $60
Industry and Company Forecasting 1 CRED1004m2 $60
Financial Analysis 1 CRED1004m3 $60
Non-Financial Analysis 1 CRED1004m4 $60
Credit Ratings and Credit Scoring 1 CRED1004m5 $60
Prerequisites: Financial Statement Analysis or equivalent level
of knowledge.
Counter Party Credit Risk - Online
CRED2062 CPE Credits: 18 Cost $200
Expansion and globalization of financial markets, complicated
derivative contracts, and an array of structured products are
giving rise to counter party credit risk. This product focuses
on the mechanics and techniques of the assessment,
quantification, and management of the credit risk for various
derivative products, and includes techniques for the mitigation
of pre-settlement and settlement risk such as netting and
margin and collateral requirements. We also look at the Monte
Carlo simulation methods for projecting worst-case exposure at
the portfolio level.
Credit Risk Modeling - Online
CRED2063 CPE Credits: 12 Cost: $150
This course deals with credit risk models and management
of credit risk. Credit risk models provide a framework for
quantifying credit risk in portfolios of traditional credit products
(loans, commitments to lend, financial letters of credit), fixed
income instruments, and market-driven instruments subject
to counter party default (swaps, forwards, etc.). This course
focuses on: Conceptual Approach to Credit Risk Modeling, most
widely accepted credit model developed by reputed agencies
such as JP Morgan, Credit Suisse First Boston, McKinsey, and
KMV. Managing credit risk on a portfolio level with special
emphasis on active credit portfolio management approach.
eLearning Courses
96 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Credit Ratings - Online
CRED1008 CPE Credits: 6 Cost $100
Credit rating is in focus because of the high-profile credit
problems and the New Basel II Proposals. This course
focuses on risk analysis approaches (as practiced by financial
institutions internally and credit rating agencies) and comprises:
Methodologies for rating credits, factors considered for credit
analysis and scoring, calibration and validation of the arrived-
at credit scores, credit rating practices of specialized rating
agencies, and Basel’s internal rating-based approach to
mitigate credit risk.
Credit Analysis - Online
CRED2061 CPE Credits: 26 Cost: $200
Traditionally, lenders have faced credit risk in the form of
default by borrowers. To this date, credit risk remains major
concern for lenders worldwide. The more they know about the
creditworthiness of a potential borrower, the greater the chance
they can maximize profits, increase market share, minimize
risk, and reduce the financial provision that must be made for
bad debt. This course provides a fundamental understanding of
the credit risk analysis process and discusses, in detail, various
aspects of financial statement analysis, including ratio and cash
flow analysis, among others to help in making better credit-
related decisions. It also looks at various non-financial factors
such as business plan, industry/sector, top management, etc.
that could affect the creditworthiness.
Financial Institution Analysis -
CAMELS Approach - Online
RISK2002 CPE Credits: 16 Cost: $150
This product assesses different aspects of commercial banks
operations to determine the soundness of its condition. The
course describes the methodology used by examiners to assess
these factors and the criteria for assigning ratings to a bank.
With the help of a case study, the course demonstrates the
method of identifying risks in internal processes, the evaluation
of these risks, monitoring procedures, and internal controls. A
case study guides us on how component ratings and composite
ratings are assigned by examiners to a bank.
Derivatives
Credit Derivatives - Online
DERV2061 CPE Credits: 7 Cost: $400
The development of credit derivatives is a logical extension of
two significant developments: securitization and derivatives.
Credit derivatives are contracts that transfer an asset’s risk and
return from one counter party to another without transferring
ownership of the underlying asset. The choice of the contract
depends upon the goals a financial institution is looking to
achieve. The global market for credit derivatives is still quite
small compared with other derivatives markets, but it is growing
rapidly. A number of impediments could slow the growth of this
market, most of which revolve around the complexity involved in
pricing and documenting these transactions.
Derivative Instruments - Online
DERV1021 CPE Credits: 7 Cost: $349
Forwards, futures, options, swaps – this course explains the
fundamentals of different derivative instruments. Tools used
in hedging and speculating strategies are reviewed, as well
as ways in which these tools are used by both individual and
institutional investors around the world. The course covers
futures pricing, the Greeks and the various options positions,
and explains the basic structure of plain vanilla swaps and how
corporations use swaps to manage their risk. It ends with a
discussion of how futures and options are traded and the use of
margin.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Basics of Forwards and Futures 2 DERV1021m1 $120
Introduction to Options 2 DERV1021m2 $120
Trading Derivatives 1 DERV1021m3 $60
Introduction to Swaps 2 DERV1021m4 $120
Forwards & Futures - Online
DERV2033 CPE Credits: 6 Cost: $299
This course expands on the introductory information provided
in Derivative Instruments to present a more in-depth look
at forwards and futures. It explores the definitions, pricing,
and applications of the different types of contracts, including
forward rate agreements (FRAs), short-term interest rate futures,
bond and note futures, and stock index futures. The course also
explains the different types of risk associated with forwards and
futures.
Individual Modules Credits Credits Cost
Introduction to Forwards and
Futures
1 DERV2033m1 $60
Forward Rate Agreements (FRAs) 1 DERV2033m2 $60
Short-Term Interest Rate Futures 1 DERV2033m3 $60
Note and Bond Futures 1 DERV2033m4 $60
Stock Index Futures 1 DERV2033m5 $60
Risks of Forwards and Futures 1 DERV2033m6 $60
Prerequisites: Derivative Instruments or equivalent level of
knowledge.
eLearning Courses
97
Options - Online
DERV2034 CPE Credits: 7 Cost: $349
Building on the Derivative Instruments course, this intensive
intermediate level course explores the different types of option
products, including options on equities, indexes, futures,
foreign exchange, and interest rates. It illustrates option
combination trading strategies, including horizontal and vertical
spreads and volatility plays. Participants explore the various
factors that have an impact on option pricing, and learn how to
apply the binomial and Black-Scholes option pricing models.
The course also demonstrates trading strategies and portfolio
management techniques using the Greeks.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Options Terminology 1 DERV2034m1 $60
Fundamentals of Options Products 1 DERV2034m2 $60
Option Combination Strategies 1 DERV2034m3 $60
Factors that Impact an Option’s
Value
1 DERV2034m4 $60
Pricing Options 2 DERV2034m5 $120
Option Sensitivities 1 DERV2034m6 $60
Prerequisites: Derivative Instruments or equivalent level of
knowledge.
Risk Management Using Derivatives -
Online
DERV2034 CPE Credits: 7 Cost: $349
It is essential for financial managers to identify risks accurately
and to use the right control techniques. This course begins
by introducing the different types of risk, and explains how to
use the risk cycle to recognize these risks and control them.
The course then moves on to the different types of derivative
techniques that can be used to manage risk, including FX risk,
short- and long-dated domestic interest rate risk, long-dated
foreign interest rate risk, and equity risk. In the final lesson,
participants are presented with several case studies that apply
what they’ve learned about using derivatives to manage risk.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Risk Management 1 DERV2034m1 $60
Identifying Risks 1 DERV2034m2 $60
Managing Foreign Exchange Risk
Using Derivatives
1 DERV2034m3 $60
Managing Short-Dated Domestic
Interest Rate Risk using Derivatives
1 DERV2034m4 $60
Managing Long-Dated Domestic
Interest Rate Risk using Derivatives
1 DERV2034m5 $60
Managing Long-Dated Foreign
Interest Rate Risk Using Derivatives
1 DERV2034m6 $60
Managing Equity Risk Using
Derivatives
1 DERV2034m6 $60
Prerequisites: Derivative Instruments or equivalent level of
knowledge.
Swaps - Online
DERV2062 CPE Credits: 14 Cost: $150
Swap transactions which involve exchange of one set of
cash flows for another, represent one of the cornerstones
of derivatives trading. Since its inception, the swaps market
has experienced phenomenal growth (over US$3 trillion in
size today). Financial institutions and corporate treasuries
are increasingly employing swaps. As financial institutions
and corporate treasuries increasingly employ swaps and
the market experiences further growth in size and number,
a professional guide to understanding swaps is essential
for the various participants. This is an excellent product for
anyone from management, trainee traders, back office support,
accountants or corporate treasurers seeking to use swaps in
asset management. It will help those with an interest in swaps
to understand the variety and complexity of today’s market.
Fixed Income
Asset Backed Securities - Online
FIMK1012 CPE Credits: 5 Cost: $249
This introductory course guides students through the evolution
of asset securitization, which results in new products for
investors and expanded sources of funding and risk transfer
opportunities for issuers. It shows how an asset-backed security
is constructed, rated by the credit agencies, traded, and valued.
The course also explores the different ABS market segments,
from the large, established segments like automobile loans,
to emerging and subprime market segments. The course
concludes with a look at current trends in the industry.
Individual Modules Credits Credits Cost
Introduction to Asset Backed
Securities
1 FIMK1012m1 $60
Structure and Rating of Asset
Backed Securities
1 FIMK1012m2 $60
Major Sectors of the Asset Backed
Securities Market
1 FIMK1012m3 $60
Pricing and Trading of Asset Backed
Securities
1 FIMK1012m4 $60
The Future of the Asset Backed
Securities Market
1 FIMK1012m5 $60
Prerequisites: Fixed Income Securities or equivalent level of
knowledge.
Fixed Income Markets - Online
FIMK1016 CPE Credits: 34 Cost: $300
Once considered a safe haven, fixed income investing now
presents an array of choices for every risk profile. This course
gives a comprehensive overview of the fixed income market.
It covers basic bond terminology, bond fundamentals, yield
calculations, and the specifics of corporate, government, and
municipal bonds. It is designed for those new to the bond
market, as well as for those in related areas of the business
seeking to expand their knowledge of this market. It is also for
personnel in sales, portfolio management, research, operations,
and systems.
eLearning Courses
98 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Fixed Income Securities - Online
FIMK1011 CPE Credits: 3 COST: $149
This broad and practical perspective of diverse short-term
and long-term fixed income instruments is invaluable for
professionals in the fixed income arena. This course provides
a solid introduction to credit risk, bond-rating systems, bond
trading terminology, techniques and strategies, yield curve and
the factors that affect it, and the role of the Federal Reserve
system and its impact on bonds. It covers the corporate,
municipal, and government bond markets, focusing on the
concepts, functions, and operations of these markets.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Bonds and their Features 1 FIMK1011m1 $60
The Fixed Income Marketplace 1 FIMK1011m2 $60
The Fixed Income Regulatory
Environment
1 FIMK1011m3 $60
Foreign Exchange
Corporate Treasury Manage ment:
Foreign Exchange Management - Online
FREX3000 CPE Credits: 14 Cost: $100
This course provides an in-depth understanding of the various
risks (transaction, translation, and economic exposure risks)
a corporate is exposed to when dealing in foreign exchange.
It discusses the sources of these exposures and techniques to
mitigate them using different financial instruments . Various
caselets in the form of simulations are provided for better
understanding. A 10-point checklist for sharing currency risks in
long-term contracts is one of the highlights of this course.
Foreign Exchange Markets - Online
FREX2000 CPE Credits: 18 Cost: $100
Different foreign exchange products and their pricing and
applications are comprehensively reviewed in this course.
Discussions include the foreign exchange market risks.
All foreign exchange derivatives such as currency futures,
swaps, options, and second-generation forward contracts are
explained. FX trading controls, as given in ACI code of conduct
are reviewed . Real case studies are also incorporated. Pricing,
structuring and application can be practiced with calculators/
simulations.
Investment & Portfolio
Management
Financial Planning - Online
INVE2037 CPE Credits: 18 Cost: $100
This course will help students plan their finances. Basic
concepts of financial planning, goal setting, and maximizing
assets are discussed. An in-depth discussion of investing
strategies is provided, including various instruments suitable
for both savers and investors. Also covered are the types of
personalities and their investment profiles along with the
various stages in the lifecycle of an investor. The course also
provides strategies for reducing tax burden. In the end, it
provides valuable information about how to build a model
portfolio that suits your risk and return profile.
Portfolio Management I - Online
INVE1004 CPE Credits: 7 Cost: $349
This introduction to portfolio management theory lays out the
different types of investor characteristics and their implications
for portfolio construction. This course also teaches the basics of
fixed income, equity, and money market securities.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
The Institutional Investor 1 INVE1004m1 $60
The Individual Investor 1 INVE1004m2 $60
Money Markets and Portfolio
Management
1 INVE1004m3 $60
Managing Portfolios with Bonds 1 INVE1004m4 $60
Managing Portfolios with Equities 1 INVE1004m5 $60
Portfolio Theory: Risk and Return 1 INVE1004m6 $60
Portfolio Theory: Portfolio
Monitoring
1 INVE1004m7 $60
Financial Statement Analysis - Online
INVE1014 CPE Credits: 7 Cost: $349
Management can be summarized as the process of making
informed decisions in three key areas: investment, financing,
and operations. Banking professionals responsible for
evaluating management success in these areas can turn to
this course for a set of crucial financial statement analysis
techniques, culminating in business valuation principles.
Participants learn how to compare companies financially,
understand cash flow, and grasp basic profitability and risk
analysis concepts.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Financial Statements 1 INVE1014m1 $60
Risk Analysis Using Ratios 2 INVE1014m2 $120
The Impact of Accounting Principles 2 INVE1014m3 $120
Value Basics 2 INVE1014m4 $120
Hedge Funds - Online
INVE1011 CPE Credits: 8 Cost: $399
Developing, offering, marketing, and investing in hedge funds
is one of the fastest growing and least understood sectors
of the asset management industry. This course presents a
comprehensive and accurate picture of the hedge fund industry,
various hedge fund strategies, hedge fund operations, and
considerations for hedge fund investors.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to the Hedge Fund
Industry
2 INVE1011m1 $120
How a Hedge Fund Works 2 INVE1011m2 $120
Hedge Fund Strategies 2 INVE1011m3 $120
Issues for Hedge Fund Investors 2 INVE1011m4 $120
eLearning Courses
99
Portfolio Management II - Online
INVE2006 CPE Credits: 8 Cost: $399
Building on Portfolio Management I, this course explains in
greater detail how to value fixed income and equity securities,
and explains the roles of global investing, emerging markets,
alternative investments, indexation, and style investing. It
illustrates specific ways to analyze portfolios, including the
Sharpe Ratio and performance attribution analysis.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Bond Valuation 1 INVE2006m1 $60
Portfolio Volatility and Duration 1 INVE2006m2 $60
Advanced Equity Valuation
Techniques
1 INVE2006m3 $60
Advanced Portfolio Management
Theory
1 INVE2006m4 $60
Global Investing and Alternative
Investments
1 INVE2006m5 $60
Indexation 1 INVE2006m6 $60
Style Investing 1 INVE2006m7 $60
Evaluating Portfolio Performance 1 INVE2006m8 $60
Prerequisites: Portfolio Management I or equivalent level of
knowledge
Mutual Funds - Online
INVE1002 CPE Credits: 10 Cost: $499
An excellent introduction to the global mutual fund industry, this
course explores the types of mutual funds, the fund selection
process, and the structure of mutual fund companies. As the
popularity of mutual funds explodes, this course also examines
the trends that are shaping the industry, including indexation,
exchange-traded funds, and the booming retirement market.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Understanding Mutual Funds 2 INVE1002m1 $120
Various Mutual Fund Products 2 INVE1002m2 $120
Selecting The Right Mutual Fund 2 INVE1002m3 $120
Operation of a Mutual Fund
Company
2 INVE1002m4 $120
Trends in the Mutual Fund Industry 2 INVE1002m5 $120
Operations & Compliance
Anti-Money Laundering - Online
OPST1036 CPE Credits: 12 Cost: $100
The 9/11 terrorist attacks in the United States have led the
international community to formulate new legislations and
guidelines to counter the escalating risks of money laundering.
across nations, Anti-Money Laundering training and compliance
requirements have therefore gained significance. It is in this
light that the American Congress brought about new measures
in the form of International Money Laundering Abatement
and Anti-Terrorist Financing Act, 2001(Title III of USA Patriot
Act, 2001) that amended the Bank Secrecy Act, 1970 and its
implementing regulation. For financial institutions today, failure
to comply with these requirements entails severe penalties
in addition to increased exposure to compliance, reputation,
strategic, and operational risks.
Bank Branch Management Suite –
All six courses below for one low price!
Cost: $350
Bank Branch Management – Trade
Finance - Online
PBNK2005 CPE Credits: 4 Cost: $100
This course explains the procedures involved in trade financing
by banks. It also discusses different aspects like: pre-shipment
credit, post-shipment credit, and letter of credit.
Bank Branch Management – Payment
and Settlement Systems - Online
PBNK2004 CPE Credits: 4 Cost: $100
This course reviews various modes of payment and settlement
systems specially electronic methods. It also discusses in detail
mechanism of electronic funds transfer.
Bank Branch Management -
Marketing - Online
PBNK2003 CPE Credits: 6 Cost: $100
This course discusses the marketing aspect of services of a
bank. Customer relationship management is also reviewed.
Bank Branch Management –
Foreign Exchange Operations - Online
PBNK2002 CPE Credits: 6 Cost: $100
This course explains foreign exchange operations of a
bank. It also discusses in detail FEDAI rules relating to forex
transactions, procedures in case of issue and encashment of
travelers’ cheques, and foreign currency notes.
Bank Branch Management – Deposits -
Online
PBNK2001 CPE Credits: 8 Cost: $100
This e-learning course provides an overview of a bank’s deposit
function, various types of deposits, and their advantages
and disadvantages. An in-depth discussion of procedures
for opening various types of accounts with a bank branch is
provided.
Bank Branch Management –
Advances - Online
PBNK200 CPE Credits: 14 Cost: $100
This course will help users understand the overview of credit
function of a bank, and various types of loans and advances by
a bank. An in-depth discussion of procedure of lending different
types of accounts by a bank branch is provided. The course
also highlights financial analysis for lending, different securities
provided for loans and advances, and asset categorization by
banks based on their performance.
eLearning Courses
100 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Brokerage Operations - Online
OPST1003 CPE Credits: 8 Cost: $399
Brokerage Operations covers all phases of securities processing
within a brokerage firm. This course illustrates how orders move
from the order room to purchase and sales and finally to the
Cashier’s Department and how the Margin Department monitors
accounts. The course concludes with a look at current trends in
the industry. Brokerage Operations was designed for beginners,
but supervisors and other experienced personnel can use it to
gain a better understanding of the field.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Brokerage
Operations
1 OPST1003m1 $60
Back Office: The Order Room 1 OPST1003m2 $60
Back Office: Purchase and Sales 1 OPST1003m3 $60
Back Office: The Margin Department 1 OPST1003m4 $60
Back Office: The Cashier’s
Department
1 OPST1003m5 $60
Current Trends in Brokerage
Operations
1 OPST1003m6 $60
New Regulations in Brokerage
Operations
1 OPST1003m7 $60
Developments in International
Brokerage Operations
1 OPST1003m8 $60
Capital Adequacy Planning –
Basel I - Online
OPST1014 CPE Creditss 14 Cost: $150
Sufficient capital is required to protect an organization’s
depositors and counter parties from an institution’s on- and
off-balance sheet risks. Banks need to have confidence in each
other’s stability to transact business. It is therefore essential
for banks to maintain adequate capital to cover their credit
and market risks. This product encompasses the international
standards agreed upon in July 1988 at the Bank for International
Settlements. The 1996 amendment to the 1988 Capital
Accord that sets out a framework for calculating the capital
requirements for market risk is also covered in this course.
Corporate Governance - Online
OPST1008 CPE Credits: 18 Cost: $200
Corporate governance deals with the complex set of
relationships between the corporation and its board of
directors, management, shareholders, and other stakeholders.
In the recent years, the regulators and legislators have
intensified their focus on how businesses are being run.
They are endeavoring to create a template for new corporate
governance and disclosure measures, which is beneficial for
both the stakeholders and controllers.
Corporate Treasury Management:
Case Studies - Online
RISK3006 CPE Credits: 10 Cost: $100
No solution is complete without real-world examples. This
course is a repository of real-life cases of corporate failures due
to improper risk management and lack of controls. The treasury
debacles at Allied Irish Bank, P&G, Gibson Greetings, Sumitomo,
and Lufthansa are discussed to give an understanding of
practical issues in treasury management. Treasury practioners
and policy makers can review their methods and systems, and
help the treasury function become more effective.
Corporate Treasury Management:
Funding and Investments - Online
RISK3004 CPE Credits: 10 Cost: $100
The short-term and long-term financing needs and methods
that cater to funding and investments of a corporation through
money and capital markets form the focus of this course group.
An overall view of managing corporate risk exposure at a
portfolio level is also provided.
Corporate Treasury Management:
Interest Rate Risk Management - Online
RISK3003 CPE Credits: 8 Cost: $100
Financial markets have seen an enormous growth in fixed-
income obligations, which in turn has increased volatility of
interest rates. The management of interest rate risk using
various derivative instruments (futures, swaps, and options)
forms the focus of this course. The mechanics and application
of these instruments for hedging, arbitrage, and speculation
purposes are discussed. Caselets and simulation exercises
facilitate better understanding of interest rate risk management.
Corporate Treasury Management:
Treasury Analytics - Online
RISK3005 CPE Credits: 10 Cost: $100
The concept of yield curve analysis, different analytical techniques
like duration, convexity and basis point value, which form the ba-
sis for understanding the overall risk measurement framework are
the elements of this course group. The practioner is introduced to
the Value-at-Risk (VaR) methodology to measure risks.
Financial Privacy - Online
OPST1037 CPE Credits: 12 Cost: $100
The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act requires financial institutions such
as banks and savings associations, credit unions, mortgage and
trust companies, insurance companies, collection agencies,
and others to disclose privacy policies, limit instances in which
consumer information can be shared with non-affiliated third
parties, and provide consumers an opportunity to protect some
of their personal financial information from being shared. The
Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council (FFIEC) has
introduced a privacy regulation implementing the Gramm-
Leach-Bliley Act which imposes certain requirements on its
member institutions. This course covers various technicalities of
privacy regulation giving relevant and convincing examples.
Margin I: Introduction to Margin
Regulations - Online
OPST1005 CPE Credits: 6 Cost: $299
This course covers margin accounts and requirements, and
explains the rules and regulations governing trading equities
and bonds on margin. The course is intended for margin,
compliance, and credit control personnel, as well as operations
professionals who interface with margin/credit functions.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Margin
Requirements
1 OPST1005m1 $60
Margin Transactions 2 OPST1005m2 $120
Margin Calls 2 OPST1005m3 $120
Margin Requirements for Day-
Trading and Bonds
1 OPST1005m4 $60
eLearning Courses
101
Margin II: Advanced Margin for Options
- Online
OPST3002 CPE Credits: 8 Cost: $399
Building on Margin I, this advanced course covers the more
complex margin requirements and calculations for various types
of option positions, such as covered and uncovered puts and
calls, index options, spreads, straddles, and combinations. It
also teaches margin rules for day trading equities and options.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Margin for Options: An Introduction 1 OPST3002m1 $60
Cash Account Option Transactions 1 OPST3002m2 $60
Long Options in Margin Accounts 1 OPST3002m3 $60
Covered and Uncovered Calls in
Margin Accounts
1 OPST3002m4 $60
Covered and Uncovered Puts in
Margin Accounts
1 OPST3002m5 $60
Day-Trading Margin Rules 1 OPST3002m6 $60
Margin Requirements for Spreads,
Straddles and Combinations
1 OPST3002m7 $60
Trading Index Options 1 OPST3002m8 $60
Prerequisites: Margin I or equivalent knowledge.
Sarbanes-Oxley - Online
OPST2062 CPE Credits: 24 Cost: $150
The series of corporate financial scandals that took place in the
United States has led to the framing of new legislation called
Sarbanes-Oxley Act that strengthens corporate governance
and restores investor confidence and eliminates corporate
corruption and fraud. The law was intended to bolster public
confidence in the nation’s capital markets and imposes new
duties and significant penalties for non- compliance on public
companies and their executives, directors, auditors, attorneys,
and securities analysts.
Private Banking
Overview of Trusts - Online
PBNK1004 CPE Credits: 5 Cost: $249
Designed for banking professionals seeking to service the
affluent or high-net-worth market, this course explains
the specific characteristics of domestic U.S. trusts and
the objectives that trusts can accomplish for wealthy U.S.
individuals. It also explores the various types of trusts and their
particular applications, concluding with the duties of a trustee.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Introduction to Trusts 1 PBNK1004m1 $60
Trusts and Taxation 1 PBNK1004m2 $60
Characteristics of Trusts 1 PBNK1004m3 $60
Types of Trusts 1 PBNK1004m4 $60
Duties of a Trustee 1 PBNK1004m5 $60
Wealth Management - Online
PBNK1001 CPE Credits: 4 Cost: $199
This course covers tax issues, diversification, duration, risk
tolerance, market timing, estate planning and dollar cost
averaging - investment vehicles and concepts that lie at the
heart of developing an investor profile and implementing
successful wealth management strategies. It concludes with
a case study integrating several issues common to wealth
management that shows the banker/investment advisor how to
apply these techniques to real-world situations.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Investor Profiling 1 PBNK1001m1 $60
Portfolio Management and Duration 1 PBNK1001m2 $60
Introduction to Portfolio Risk 1 PBNK1001m3 $60
Asset Allocation and Taxation 1 PBNK1001m4 $60
Professional Skills
Communicating with Confidence:
Make Your Presentations More
Effective - Online
PCSK2002 CPE Credits: 4 Cost: $200
The ability to communicate clearly and effectively is increasingly
important in organizational settings. This course helps learners
organize, structure, and create effective presentations.
Since many organizations use PowerPoint™ as a way of
communicating information, this course offers advice and
guidance on the most effective and persuasive uses of
PowerPoint™.
Communicating with Confidence:
Make Your Business Writing
More Effective - Online
PCSK2001 CPE Credits:4 Cost: $200
The ability to write clearly and directly is highly prized in
organizations. This course focuses on improving business
writing. The ideas, techniques, and checklists in this
course apply to all forms of business writing: memos,
reports, brochures, proposals, presentations, catalogs, and
websites. Other topics include formal and informal outlining
techniques, how to revise for wordiness, unnecessary phrases,
redundancy, and jargon, and the appropriate use of email in an
organizational setting.
Introduction to Critical Thinking -
Online
PCSK1003 CPE Credits: 4 Cost: $200
This course introduces the importance of critical thinking in
the business world. Critical thinking is an intellectual model for
reasoning through issues to reach well-founded conclusions
about them. Asking questions is at the heart of critical thinking.
This course is designed to help learners define and identify
critical thinking and reasoning skills and develop those skills.
eLearning Courses
102 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Project Management
(Complete - Parts 1 and 2) - Online
Save $400 by registering for the complete suite
CPE Credits: 35 Cost: $1,000
Part 1: PCSK3002 CPE Credits: 17.5 Cost: $700
Part 2: PCSK3000 CPE Credits: 17.5 Cost: $700
This completely online and self-paced 10-module Project
Management program builds successful project managers
at all levels of the organization. It provides a comprehensive
preparation for the PMP
®
certification exam including exam
taking tips, 10 comprehensive module quizzes, and a practice
exam covering the PMBOK
®
areas of knowledge.
The Successful Manager: Time
Management - Online
PCSK3000 CPE Credits: 3 Cost: $150
One of the more precious resources a manager has is his or
her time. Managers can become more effective by employing
time management and scheduling techniques, delegating,
outsourcing key tasks, and employing technology. Effective time
management helps managers achieve their goals.
Risk Management
Asset Liability Management - Online
RISK2000 CPE Credits: 56 Cost: $400
Volatile global markets, proliferation of new financial products,
and changing regulatory environments have made Asset
Liability Management (ALM) a critical function for banks and
financial institutions today. It is therefore becoming increasingly
important to define, measure, monitor, and manage an
institution’s exposure to foreign exchange, interest rate and
liquidity risks on a coordinated and consistent basis.
Asset Liability Management for
Insurance Companies - Online
RISK3002 CPE Credits: 58 Cost: $400
This course focuses on the traditional, as well as the ever-
changing landscape of ALM for the insurance industry. The
traditional methods of identifying, measuring and managing risk
are reviewed and up-to-date developments in risk measurement
are explored with emphasis on the management and control
of risk in insurance institutions and how the ALM process
integrates with the overall strategy of the firm.
Basel II University - Online
RISK2004 CPE Credits: 126 Cost: $400
This is a comprehensive course that covers the requirements
for Basel II as per the revised framework “International
Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards”.
It covers in detail the primary components, or pillars, i.e.,
minimum capital requirements, supervisory review process, and
market discipline.
Global Banking Supervision - Online
RISK2003 CPE Credits: 30 Cost: $200
Banks serve unique economic functions and those functions are
directly related to their inherent vulnerability. Weaknesses in the
banking system of a country, whether developing or developed,
can threaten financial stability both within that country and
internationally. In today’s financial environment, dominated
by a dynamic, aggressive financial service industry, banks as
major players, operate with greater freedom. Banks are exposed
to greater financial risks than before due to the appearance of
more complex and dynamic transactions that have substantially
increased uncertainties. Advances in IT, capital movements, and
geographical extension of banking business have become the
new engines of global integration. What seems to be important
for banking systems is not the size, but the level of compliance
with the internationally accepted rules and standards, and their
functionality.
Governance, Risk, and Compliance - Online
RISK2003 CPE Credits: 14 Cost: $100
In recent times there has been a significant shift in financial
institutions worldwide in terms of how they approach corporate
governance, risk management, and regulatory compliance. There
continues to be increasing stakeholder demands and growing
public scrutiny resulting from spectacular failures around the globe.
Governance, Risk Management, and Compliance, or in short GRC,
has evolved from managing risk as a transaction or compliance
activity adding to business value by improving operational decision
making and strategic planning. This course on Governance, Risk
and Compliance comprises modules that provide knowledge and
an understanding related to the subjects of governance, risk, and
compliance as applicable to the banking sector .
Liquidity Management & Contingency
Funding Plan - Online
RISK2001 CPE Credits: 28 Cost: $300
Liquidity is essential in all banks to compensate for expected
and unexpected balance sheet fluctuations and to provide
funds for growth. The recent liquidity crises faced by banks and
financial institutions have brought to the fore the need to review
their existing liquidity management policies, practices and
procedures.
Market Risk Basics - Online
Risk1013 CPE Credits: 16 Cost: $150
This course covers: Building Blocks of Market Risk; Financial
Mathematics such as Time Value of Money; Statistical concepts
such as Probability Distribution, Volatility, Correlation and
Regression; Bond Pricing and Yield Analysis; Risk measurement
concepts such as Gap Analysis, Duration Analysis, Simulation
Analysis, and Basis Point Value.
The basic level courses are packed with interactive practical
examples, calculators, and intuitive explanations that form a
solid foundation for market risk management.
eLearning Courses
103
Market Risk Intermediate - Online
Risk3001 CPE Credits: 16 Cost: $150
This course covers several important topics in the industry
such as Back Testing and Stress Testing that are presented with
practical examples in an engaging and interactive fashion. A
comprehensive annual survey on Value-at-Risk methodologies
(assumptions, choice of models, and the amount/type of
exposure) used by leading financial institutions worldwide is
presented.
Market Risk Advanced - Online
Risk5000 CPE Credits: 8 Cost: $100
This course is an in-depth coverage of Advanced Market Risk
Models, Statistical Models, Stress Testing & Scenario Analysis,
and Risk-adjusted Performance Measurement. Complex theories
and concepts that are presented in a simple and easy-to-
understand manner with practice exercises, calculators, and
other interactive features. The course draws on real-life case
studies extensively and includes a comprehensive and exclusive
discussion of case studies.
Operational Risk Management - Online
RISK4000 CPE Credits: 42 Cost: $250
Changes in markets, techniques, technologies, and products
have altered the landscape of operations and fueled the
explosive development of Operational Risk Management. The
regulators of financial and public companies are demanding a
far greater level of disclosure and awareness by directors about
the risks they manage and the effectiveness of the controls they
have in place to reduce or mitigate these risks. There is also
a greater realization that a major source of earnings volatility
can be attributed to the way a firm operates and not “financial
risk”. All these changes have triggered the need for an efficient
Operational Risk Management system in organizations.
Value-at-Risk - Online
RISK5001 CPE Credits: 32 Cost: $300
Value-at-Risk is vital for banks, securities firms, commodity
and energy merchants, and other trading organizations to be
able to track their portfolios’ market risk. It is a measure used
by financial practitioners to quantify risk of a portfolio. The
course introduces the topic and provides an up-to-date working
knowledge of all aspects of VaR analysis, including the latest
VaR models in theory and practice.
Structured Products
Asset Securitization - Online
STRM2000 CPE Credits: 50 Cost: $400
Asset Securitization (AS) has revolutionized the field of finance.
It provides an opportunity for financial institutions to enhance
liquidity, generate fee-based income, and optimize the usage
of capital. It can be a source of competitive financing for
corporations. For investors, securitized assets offer additional
investment opportunities with different risk/return trade-offs.
Trading
Short-Term Trading - Online
TRAD1005 CPE Credits: 8 Cost: $399
The successful day trader must have a fundamental
understanding of capital, philosophy, planning, risk
management, and technical analysis. Short-Term Trading begins
with a brief history of the field, stressing the importance of
developing a trading style and philosophy, identifying capital
requirements, analyzing the market, and applying that analysis
to the execution of a trade. It concludes with a consideration of
appropriate preparatory research and risk management skills.
Individual Modules Credits Code Cost
Overview and History of Short-Term
Trading
2 TRAD1005m1 $120
Market Indicators and Information 2 TRAD1005m2 $120
Technical Analysis for Day Trading 2 TRAD1005m3 $120
Research, Planning, and Executing
Day Trades
2 TRAD1005m4 $120
New Rules for Letters of Credit - Online
UCP600 CPE Credits: 1 Cost: $60
This course highlights major changes being made to the
Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits,
International Chamber of Commerce Publication No. 500 (UCP)
with the adoption of the UCP600. This course has relevance to
all parties involved with letters of credit, but is especially aimed
at exporters. The course highlights the changes that will have
the greatest impact on letters of credit beneficiaries.
104 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Virtual NYIF: New York Institute of Finance is proud to offer Virtual Classes—live;
expert-led online training that gives you the freedom to learn anywhere.
A Virtual Classroom is a web-based environment that allows students to participate in live training events
without the need to travel. Students listen to lectures, participate in exercises, ask questions, and receive
feedback just as they would do in a conventional classroom—except they do so from the convenience of
their desktops, or anywhere an Internet connection and an audio-enabled computer are available. It saves
the hassle, expense, and travel time to a training site.
Virtual NYIF classes recreate a physical classroom in a virtual setting all delivered via a standard web
browser. A powerful presentation space and whiteboard serve as a focal point for the class. Instructors have
an array of tools to monitor and support students in real time, and students can interact with each other
and the instructor via voice or text. Virtual NYIF allows you, the student, to get the best financial training
without leaving your desk!
Anti-Money Laundering ■
Dates January 30, 9:00 am–12:00 pm
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Vincent Primerano
Code OPST1038
Cost $600
This course offers an introduction to anti-money laundering with due diligence in respect
to knowing the customer accurately and authentically; and knowing their usual business
and associates coupled with an awareness of any money laundering activities involving
them or their account(s), initially or in the distant future.
This course is a must for all financial managers and employees involved with clients and
clients’ accounts. Case studies are used to practice the concepts.
An IPO Primer ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Pat Sparacio
Code CRCN1048
Cost $600
The IPO market is hot again and understanding the IPO process from start to finish
will raise your awareness of how companies make their way to the public market.
Understand the motivation for an IPO, the road show, the players, and the underwriting
process.
Analyzing Pension Footnotes and New Regulations ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code SPEC1005
Cost $600
Now that FASB has elected to put pensions on the balance sheet, publically traded
companies will be required to state the underfunded and overfunded status of their
pension and benefit plans at the end of the fiscal years after December 15th. Come and
learn about pension footnotes and the new regulations.
Brokerage Operations ■
Dates March 3, 10, 24 & 31; April 7
Sessions 15 hours / 5 sessions
Instructor David Weiss
Code OPST1035
Cost $2,000
This course is essential for understanding which processes are brought into play
after a trade occurs at a brokerage firm and provides a step-by-step analysis of how
a full service broker-dealer operates. It is equally important to understand the non-
trade related aspects of servicing clients’ accounts and what to be cognizant of in the
protection of the firm from unscrupulous individuals.
Business and Industry Analysis ■
Dates January 14, 3:00 pm–6:00 pm
Sessions 1
Instructor Pat Sparacio
Code CRPF1022
Cost $600
Any company analysis should begin with an understanding of business and operations
and many business and competitive analysis techniques are available. This course will
highlight the most effective and efficient of these techniques to give you the tools you
need to perform a comprehensive qualitative analysis.
Capital Markets: Macro Economics ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code CRCN1049
Cost $600
Despite the many economic indicators available, there are ultimately only three
measures of an economy which are introduced in this course. First is output—the total
amount of goods and services produced by an economy, typically measured by either
Gross Domestic Product or Gross National Product. Second is inflation—a measure of
diminished purchasing power, measured by indices such as Consumer Price Index or
Producer Price Index. Finally is unemployment—the number of people looking for work
(active labor force), but not working.
Commodity Trading Fundamentals ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code TRAD-1009
Cost $600
Commodities are hotter than ever. Learn more about the products and markets, trading,
futures contracts, the exchanges, and the risk/rewards of this alternative investment.
Corporate Governance ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code OPST1039
Cost $600
With the new rules under Sarbanes-Oxley, there is an increased interest in understanding
the general topic of corporate governance. This overview builds the framework for SOX
beginning with the historical factors leading to increased corporate governance. You will
learn the current regulations protecting investor rights and knowledge, as well as the
corporate danger signals. Recent corporate governance landmark cases are discussed,
as well as the new proposed amendments to Sarbanes-Oxley.
Credit Structuring Primer ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Pat Sparacio
Code CRED-1009
Cost $600
Want to know more about credit structuring? This course will cover the basics of loan
structuring including facilities, guarantees, holding company lending, subordinations,
covenants, and security.
Customer Loyalty: Cost vs. Benefits – A Quantitative Approach ■
Dates February 6, April 16;
9:00 am–12:00 pm
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Richard Malekian
Code CRPF-1021
Cost $600
This course will offer participants the knowledge and ability to use the concept of
customer loyalty to create value for shareholders. Participants will learn why customer
loyalty is an important measure in business performance evaluation, and how to
quantify the value of each customer in economic terms. This course will help business
executives to use customer loyalty and customer value as a means to establish a
competitive advantage in the marketplace.
Economics Primer ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code CRCN-1050
Cost $600
By definition, economics is the study of the use of scarce resources which
have alternative uses. In this session, learn about different schools of thought,
microeconomics, and macroeconomics, and theories and concepts such as supply and
demand.
Free Cash Flow: The Key to Shareholder Value Creation (Part I) ■
Dates March 12, May 7;
9:00 am–12:00 pm
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Richard Malekian
Code CRPF-1021
Cost $600
This course will offer participants the knowledge and ability to use Free Cash Flow as a
business management tool to create value for shareholders. Participants will learn why
Free Cash Flow is superior to net income in evaluating business performance, and how
to use this metric to analyze current and future investment opportunities. In addition,
participants will learn how to incorporate cost of capital and return on investment into
Free Cash Flow analysis, and how to create and optimize the drivers of Free Cash Flow.
Virtual NYIF
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 105
Free Cash Flow: The Key to Shareholder Value Creation (Part 2) ■
Dates March 9, May 14;
9:00 am–12:00 pm
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Richard Malekian
Code CRPF-2000
Cost $600
This course will offer participants the knowledge and ability to use Free Cash Flow as a
business management tool to create value for shareholders. Participants will learn how
to analyze capital budgeting and acquisition opportunities using Free Cash Flow, how to
calculate Modified Free Cash Flow, and how to use Modified Free Cash Flow to analyze
strategic investments.
Free Cash Flow: The Key to Shareholder Value Creation ■
(Parts 1 and 2 combined)
Dates Part 1: March 12, May 7
Part 2: March 9, May 14
9:00 am–12:00 pm
Sessions 6 hours / 2 sessions
Instructor Richard Malekian
Code CRPF-2001
Cost $1,000
This course will offer participants the knowledge and ability to use Free Cash Flow as a
business management tool to create value for shareholders. Participants will learn why
Free Cash Flow is superior to net income in evaluating business performance, and how
to use this metric to analyze current and future investment opportunities. In addition,
participants will learn how to incorporate cost of capital and return on investment into
Free Cash Flow analysis, how to create and optimize the drivers of Free Cash Flow, how
to analyze capital budgeting and acquisition opportunities using Free Cash Flow, how to
calculate “Modified Free Cash Flow”, and how to use Modified Free Cash Flow to analyze
strategic investments.
Save $200 on this combined class
Inflation and Deflation ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code CRCN-1051
Cost $600
This course compares and contrasts the traditional theories for causes of inflation:
Keynesian, Cost-push, Demand-pull, and Phillips Curve. Also covered is an analysis of
aggregate supply and demand, the monetarist theory of economic intervention, and
different inflation indicators related to market performance.
Intro to Indexes ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code CRCN-1052
Cost $600
Focus on the index business including construction and design of indexes, investment
products and derivative products, and the future of indexing for capital markets.
Introduction to LBOs ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Valisha Graves
Code MANA-1000
Cost $600
A flurry of market activity in the leverage buyout market over the last two years makes
this a hot topic for discussion. Do you read about LBOs but are not quite sure of what
they are? Join us for an informative session on this very market relevant topic.
M & A Separation Techniques ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Pat Sparacio
Code MANA-2013
Cost $600
M&A continues to grow at an unprecedented pace. Growth in the first quarter alone has
exceeded 2006 by 27%. Join us to understand how companies create shareholder value
through separation techniques such as spin-offs, carve-outs, divestitures, and others.
Introduction to Municipal Bonds ■
Dates January 30, 6:00 pm–9:00 pm
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Doug Carroll
Code FIMK-1015
Cost $600
Municipal bonds are attractive to many investors because the interest income is exempt
from federal income tax, and in many cases, state and local taxes as well. In this session,
learn about different types of municipal bonds and bond funds, how to evaluate the tax
advantages of municipal bonds, and buying and selling strategies.
Virtual NYIF
106 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Overview of Equities ■
Dates January 9, 4:30 pm–7:30pm
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Lance Eckel
Code INVE-1039
Cost $600
The equities market is of interest to professional and individual investors. This class
will cover the characteristics of stocks, the exchanges, purchasing and selling securities
in the OTC market, risk and returns associated with equity products, equity market
participants. It also provides a brief overview of why companies sell stocks, types of
equity investments, and analysis of equities.
Overview of Trade Finance ■
Dates January 29, 3:00 pm–6:00 pm
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor Pat Sparacio
Code TRAD-1008
Cost $600
Learn the essentials of trade finance including key trade and finance products and their
features, export agencies, forfeiting and factoring, common problems, and key issues
facing the industry.
So You Want to Be an Investment Banker ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code CRCN-1053
Cost $600
Investment banking has been the source of increased earnings at financial institutions
and has always been a much sought after career path. Learn about the investment
banking business: the players, the markets and recent deals.
Understanding Corporate Balance Sheets and Income Statements ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code AATX-1006
Cost $600
Understand the income statement and balance sheet components of corporate financial
statements and how accounts flow. No accounting background required.
Understanding Derivative Product Footnotes ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code DERV-2063
Cost $600
Have a fundamental understanding of derivatives? Need to know more about Derivative
Arrangements and the meaning of these financial footnotes? Walk through a case study
where explanations and examples will be provided to demystify the numbers.
Understanding Financial Institutions Balance Sheets and Income ■
Statements
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code AATX-1007
Cost $600
Work for a bank? Do you want to know how banks make money? Understand the in and
outs of financial services firms by examining their financial statements.
Understanding Financial Statement Footnotes ■
Dates TBA
Sessions 3 hours / 1 session
Instructor TBA
Code AATX-1008
Cost $600
You may have a good understanding of accounting concepts, but deciphering and
understanding the implications of financial statement footnotes may still leave you
guessing. Using a case study, students will review and discuss the main corporate
statement footnotes.
Virtual NYIF
Key: S Stamford M Midtown D Downtown
D
Day
n
Evening
N
for 2008
B
FREE Book Included
C
Financial Calculator Required 107
108
Rent our State-of-the-Art Training Rooms
The New York Institute of Finance offers
state-of-the-art classrooms equipped
with today’s best technology.
Training at our midtown location offers
many advantages and keeps the focus
on learning. It ensures that your day-
to-day operations continue to run
uninterrupted while your employees
learn and build necessary skills.
Simply provide us with a schedule of
classes, your system requirements,
and number of trainees (up to 40 per
class). Catering options are available.
Basic training rooms include instructor
laptop, Infocus projector, dry erase
whiteboard, and Internet access.
Contact Sharon Resnik for more information and to discuss your needs:
sharon.resnik@nyif.com
In-House Training Options
Group of
10 or More?
We can bring any class
in-house to your company.
Our instructors travel all over the
world taking New York Institute
of Finance classes to our clients’
locations. Each student receives
the same quality learning
experience that students receive
at our campus-based classes,
with the same books and the
same comprehensive class
documentation.
Call our Business Development
Managers at 212-641-6616 for
more information.
Group
Discounts
Group discounts are available on
all of our classes. Please contact
our Client Services team for more
information.
For larger organizations, ask about
our Learning Partnership Program
(LPP). The LPP is an efficient and
cost effective way to bring a wide
range of Continuing Professional
Education opportunities to your
employees. The program offers
large volume discounts when seats
at our classes are bought as a
package which can be used for any
class throughout the year.
Private
Tutoring
Can’t come to one of our regularly
scheduled classes? Need help on
a particular subject? Contact us to
schedule private tutoring on any
finance subject, including CFA
®

Exam Preparation.
Email customercare@nyif.com.
Every attendee at a New York Institute of Finance
course receives a COMPLIMENTARY six-month
subscription to the Financial Times* and FT.com.
*U.S. residents only. Non-U.S. and Canada residents
receive an FT.com subscription only.
Alumni Refer-A-Friend Program
Tell your friends about the
New York Institute of Finance and earn
a $25 gift certificate*
At the New York Institute of Finance,
we’re proud of the quality of our
courses and we believe that we’re the
best in the marketplace. Our instructors
are consistently rated as ‘excellent’ and
our students frequently return to take
classes with us again and again.
Our alumni are our best ambassadors
and the Refer-A-Friend program is
designed to reward those who help
spread the word.
Tell a friend or colleague about the New
York Institute of Finance and if they
sign-up for a course with us, qualifying
alumni will receive a $25 Amazon.com
gift certificate. The new student will
also get a $15 Amazon.com gift
certificate as a welcome gift.
There’s no limit to the number of gift
certificates alumni can earn, so the
more people you tell, the more gift
certificates you can receive.
For more information and to find out how to start referring, visit
www.nyif.com/raf
Terms and conditions apply. See website for more information.
*Amazon.com is not a sponsor of this promotion. Amazon.com, the Amazon.com logo, and 1-Click are reg-
istered trademarks of Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. Amazon.com gift certificates are redeemable only
at www.amazon.com. See www.amazon.com/gc-legal for terms and conditions of use of Amazon.com gift
certificates.
New York Institute of Finance 2008 Course Calendar
109
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Special Programs
Core Skills Analyst Program
Financial Modeling 7-Jan 5 Mon-Fri 6
Accounting Bootcamp 28-Jan 5 Mon-Fri 5
Accounting Bootcamp 31-Mar 5 Mon-Fri 5
Core Skills Analyst Program with Accounting
Bootcamp
31-Mar 20 Various 4
Core Skills Analyst Program (without
Accounting Bootcamp)
7-Apr 15 Various 4
Credit Risk Analysis 7-Apr 5 Mon-Fri 5
Corporate Finance & Valuation Fundamentals 14-Apr 5 Mon-Fri 6
Financial Modeling 21-Apr 5 Mon-Fri 6
Accounting Bootcamp 4-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 5
Core Skills Analyst Program with Accounting
Bootcamp
4-Aug 20 Various 4
Core Skills Analyst Program (without
Accounting Bootcamp)
11-Aug 15 Various 4
Credit Risk Analysis 11-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 5
Corporate Finance & Valuation Fundamentals 18-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 6
Financial Modeling 25-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 6
Introducing Wall Street
Introducing Wall Street - A Case Study
Approach
24-Mar 5 Mon-Fri 7
Introducing Wall Street - A Case Study
Approach
22-Sep 5 Mon-Fri 7
Introducing Wall Street (Evening) 4-Nov 7 Tue 7
Technical Analysis
Technical Analysis - Principles & Theories 25-Feb 5 Mon-Fri 8
Technical Analysis and Strategy Program 25-Feb 10 Various 8
Advanced Technical Analysis / Real Time
Usage
3-Mar 5 Mon-Fri 8
Technical Analysis - Principles & Theories 21-Apr 5 Mon-Fri 8
Technical Analysis and Strategy Program 21-Apr 11 Various 8
Advanced Technical Analysis / Real Time
Usage
28-Apr 5 Mon-Fri 8
Technical Analysis - Principles & Theories 1-Dec 5 Mon-Fri 8
Technical Analysis and Strategy Program 1-Dec 12 Various 8
Advanced Technical Analysis / Real Time
Usage
8-Dec 5 Mon-Fri 8
Wealth Management Program
Introduction to the Wealth Environment 7-Jul 1 Mon 9
Wealth Management Program 7-Jul 15 Various 9
Grow Wealth: Liquidity 8-Jul 2 Tue-Wed 10
Grow Wealth: Asset Management 10-Jul 2 Thu-Fri 10
Grow/Protect Wealth: Alternative Investments 14-Jul 2 Mon-Tue 10
Protect Wealth: International Estate Planning 16-Jul 3 Wed-Fri 10
Grow/Protect Wealth: Derivatives 21-Jul 2 Mon-Tue 11
Consultative Selling Skills to Investment
Clients
23-Jul 2 Wed-Thu 11
Anti-Money Laundering 25-Jul 1 Fri 11
KYC (Know Your Client) 28-Jul 1 Mon 12
Corporate Finance & Financial Management
Solutions for Wealth Advisors
29-Jul 2 Tue-Wed 12
Accounting & Tax
Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3 22-Jan 1 Tue 15
Core Skills Analyst Program - Accounting
Bootcamp
28-Jan 5 Mon-Fri 15
Introduction to Financial Accounting
(Evening)
28-Jan 10 Mon 16
Brokerage Accounting 4-Feb 2 Mon-Tue 14
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Intermediate Accounting Topics: Leases,
Pensions, Deferred Taxes
4-Feb 2 Mon-Tue 16
Tax Concepts for Finance 11-Feb 2 Mon-Tue 17
Introduction to Financial Accounting 12-Feb 2 Tue-Wed 16
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging 10-Mar 3 Mon-Wed 13
Core Skills Analyst Program - Accounting
Bootcamp
31-Mar 5 Mon-Fri 15
Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions 2-Apr 1 Wed 13
Advanced Financial Accounting Topics 7-Apr 5 Mon 14
Transparency in Financial Statements 7-Apr 1 Mon 17
Inter-Company Investments and Consolidated
Financial Statements
23-Apr 2 Wed-Thu 16
Introduction to Financial Accounting
(Evening)
28-Apr 10 Mon 16
Tax Concepts for Finance 6-May 2 Tue-Wed 17
Comparing US GAAP and International
Financial Reporting Standards
28-May 3 Wed-Fri 14
Introduction to Financial Accounting 11-Jun 2 Wed-Thu 16
Intermediate Accounting Topics: Leases,
Pensions, Deferred Taxes
12-Jun 2 Thu-Fri 16
Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3 18-Jun 1 Wed 15
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging 23-Jun 3 Mon-Wed 13
Core Skills Analyst Program - Accounting
Bootcamp
4-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 15
Inter-Company Investments and Consolidated
Financial Statements
8-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 16
Introduction to Financial Accounting
(Evening)
8-Sep 10 Mon 16
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging 15-Sep 3 Mon-Wed 13
Brokerage Accounting 22-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 14
Transparency in Financial Statements 25-Sep 1 Thu 17
Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3 7-Oct 1 Tue 15
Tax Concepts for Finance 27-Oct 2 Mon-Tue 17
Advanced Financial Accounting Topics 3-Nov 5 Mon 14
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging 10-Nov 3 Mon-Wed 13
Comparing US GAAP and International
Financial Reporting Standards
10-Nov 3 Mon-Wed 14
Introduction to Financial Accounting 12-Nov 2 Wed-Thu 16
Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions 3-Dec 1 Wed 13
Introduction to Financial Accounting 3-Dec 2 Wed-Thu 16
Intermediate Accounting Topics: Leases,
Pensions, Deferred Taxes
8-Dec 2 Mon-Tue 16
Alternative Investments
Hedge Funds 15-Jan 1 Tue 18
Hedge Funds 5-Mar 1 Wed 18
Advanced Hedge Funds 19-Mar 1 Wed 18
Introduction to Private Equity Investments 10-Apr 1 Thu 19
Hedge Funds 13-May 1 Tue 18
Introduction to Alternative Investments 4-Jun 2 Wed-Thu 18
Hedge Funds 5-Jun 1 Thu 18
Advanced Hedge Funds 10-Jun 1 Tue 18
Hedge Funds 12-Aug 1 Tue 18
Introduction to Alternative Investments 13-Aug 2 Wed-Thu 18
Introduction to Private Equity Investments 25-Aug 1 Mon 19
Advanced Hedge Funds 17-Sep 1 Wed 18
Hedge Funds 8-Oct 1 Wed 18
Introduction to Alternative Investments 9-Dec 2 Tue-Wed 18
Hedge Funds 10-Dec 1 Wed 18
Hedge Funds 16-Dec 1 Tue 18
New York Institute of Finance 2008 Course Calendar
110
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
CFA
®
/ CFT Exam Prep
CFA Exam Level II 18 Session Review Class 15-Jan 18 Tue 22
CFA Exam Level I 18 Session Review Class 16-Jan 18 Wed 20
CFA Exam Level I Review Suite 16-Jan 18 Various 20
CFA Exam Level I 18 Session Review Class 19-Jan 18 Sat 20
CFA Core Concepts - Quantitative Methods 26-Jan 6 Sat 21
CFA Core Concepts - Accounting 8-Mar 6 Sat 21
CFA Exam Level I Problem Solving 19-Apr 3 Sat 21
CFA Exam Level II Problem Solving TBD 2 Sat 22
CFA Exam Level I Weeklong Intensive 19-May 5 Mon-Fri 21
CMT Examination Preparation/Technical
Analysis
9-Jul 2 Wed-Thu 22
CFA Core Concepts - Quantitative Methods August 6 Sat 21
CFA Exam Level I 18 Session Review Class August 18 Wed 20
CFA Exam Level I 18 Session Review Class August 18 Sat 20
CFA Exam Level I Review Suite August 18 Various 20
CFA Core Concepts - Accounting Fall 6 Sat 21
CFA Exam Level I Problem Solving Fall 3 Sat 21
CFA Exam Level I Weeklong Intensive Fall 5 Mon-Fri 21
Core Finance Concepts
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry
(Evening)
10-Jan 10 Thu 27
Essentials of US Capital Markets 29-Jan 3 Tue-Thu 24
Statistical Concepts for the Marketplace
(Evening)
30-Jan 4 Wed 30
Tax Concepts for Finance 11-Feb 2 Mon-Tue 31
Essentials of Banking 13-Feb 2 Wed-Thu 24
Economic Indicators: Clues to the Future 14-Feb 2 Thu-Fri 23
Financial Forecasting: Concepts and
Applications (Evening)
27-Feb 2 Wed-Thu 25
Financial Statement Analysis (Evening) 5-Mar 10 Wed 26
Corporate Treasury Management 10-Mar 4 Mon-Thu 23
Managerial Finance 13-Mar 2 Thu-Fri 28
Finance Essentials for the Professional 17-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 24
Financial Analysis of Insurance Companies 17-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 25
Foreign Exchange Marketplace 27-Mar 2 Thu-Fri 26
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry 27-Mar 2 Thu-Fri 27
Overview of Trade Finance Concepts (Evening) 3-Apr 2 Thu 29
Reading the Financial Times 11-Apr 1 Fri 30
International Capital Markets 14-Apr 4 Mon-Thu 28
Practical Applications of Sarbanes-Oxley 23-Apr 1 Wed 29
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry
(Evening)
24-Apr 10 Thu 27
Essentials of US Capital Markets 28-Apr 3 Mon-Wed 24
Global Economic Analysis 5-May 3 Mon-Wed 27
Tax Concepts for Finance 6-May 2 Tue-Wed 31
Probability and Statistics for the Finance
Professional (Evening)
7-May 8 Wed 30
Financial Statement Analysis 12-May 2 Mon-Tue 26
Energy Markets 14-May 2 Wed-Thu 23
Essentials of US Capital Markets 19-May 2 Mon-Wed 24
Foreign Exchange Marketplace (Evening) 22-May 6 Thu 26
Overview of Asian Capital Markets 2-Jun 4 Mon 29
Essentials of Banking 9-Jun 2 Mon-Tue 24
Strategic Financial Analysis 12-Jun 2 Thu-Fri 31
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry 19-Jun 2 Thu-Fri 27
Finance Essentials for the Professional 23-Jun 2 Mon-Tue 24
Managerial Finance 26-Jun 2 Thu-Fri 28
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Reading the Financial Times 8-Jul 1 Tue 30
Practical Applications of Sarbanes-Oxley 20-Aug 1 Wed 29
Essentials of US Capital Markets 9-Sep 3 Tue-Thu 24
Financial Statement Analysis (Evening) 10-Sep 10 Wed 26
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry
(Evening)
10-Sep 10 Wed 27
Statistical Concepts for the Marketplace
(Evening)
16-Sep 4 Tue 30
Finance Essentials for the Professional 17-Sep 2 Wed-Thu 24
Managerial Finance 18-Sep 2 Thu-Fri 28
Financial Analysis of Insurance Companies 22-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 25
Foreign Exchange Marketplace (Evening) 25-Sep 6 Thu 26
Economic Indicators: Clues to the Future 2-Oct 2 Thu-Fri 23
Financial Forecasting: Concepts and
Applications
2-Oct 1 Thu 25
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry 16-Oct 2 Thu-Fri 27
Overview of Asian Capital Markets 16-Oct 4 Thu 29
Essentials of US Capital Markets 21-Oct 3 Tue-Thu 24
Tax Concepts for Finance 27-Oct 2 Mon-Tue 31
Essentials of Banking 3-Nov 2 Mon-Tue 24
Financial Statement Analysis 10-Nov 2 Mon-Tue 26
Managerial Finance 13-Nov 2 Thu-Fri 28
Practical Applications of Sarbanes-Oxley 13-Nov 1 Thu 29
Energy Markets 24-Nov 2 Mon-Tue 23
Strategic Financial Analysis 4-Dec 2 Thu-Fri 31
Corporate Treasury Management 8-Dec 4 Mon-Thu 23
Foreign Exchange Marketplace 11-Dec 2 Thu-Fri 26
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry 11-Dec 2 Thu-Fri 27
Corporate Finance
Financial Modeling for Corporate Finance
(Evening)
28-Jan 6 Mon 34
Core Skills Analyst Program - Corporate
Finance & Valuation Fundamentals
14-Apr 5 Mon-Fri 32
Essentials of Corporate Finance 23-Apr 3 Wed-Fri 33
International Corporate Finance 5-May 5 Mon-Fri 34
Financial Modeling for Corporate Finance
(Evening)
2-Jun 6 Mon 34
Know Your Client 28-Jul 1 Mon 35
Corporate Finance & Financial Management
Solutions for Wealth Advisors
29-Jul 2 Tue-Wed 33
Core Skills Analyst Program - Corporate
Finance & Valuation Fundamentals
18-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 32
Essentials of Corporate Finance 26-Aug 3 Tue-Thu 33
Essentials of Corporate Finance 13-Oct 3 Mon-Wed 33
Advanced Corporate Finance 20-Oct 5 Mon-Fri 32
International Corporate Finance 20-Oct 5 Mon-Fri 34
Introduction to Financial Engineering 10-Nov 3 Mon-Wed 35
Initial Public Offerings TBD 1 TBD 34
Credit Risk
Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis 14-Jan 1 Mon 42
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 15-Jan 1 Tue 42
Overview of Basel II 24-Jan 1 Thu 42
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 28-Jan 6 Mon & Wed 38
Credit Risk Analysis 4-Feb 5 Mon-Fri 39
Credit Risk Analysis for Private Bankers 11-Feb 2 Mon-Tue 39
Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis 11-Feb 1 Mon 42
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 12-Feb 1 Tue 42
Corporate Credit Risk Judgment 25-Feb 4 Mon-Thu 38
Credit Risk Analysis 25-Feb 5 Mon-Fri 39
New York Institute of Finance 2008 Course Calendar
111
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Demystifying Cash Flow 25-Feb 1 Mon 40
Basel II Credit Risk 3-Mar 3 Mon-Wed 36
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
4-Mar 1 Tue 41
Corporate Failure - Early Warnings Signs 10-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 37
Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives 10-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 40
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
12-Mar 3 Wed-Fri 41
Analysis of Financial Institutions 13-Mar 2 Thu-Fri 36
Advanced Credit Risk Analysis 17-Mar 3 Mon-Wed 36
Financial Analysis of Insurance Companies 17-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 41
Credit Structuring 27-Mar 1 Thu 40
Overview of Basel II 3-Apr 1 Thu 42
Core Skills Analyst Program - Credit Risk
Analysis
7-Apr 5 Mon-Fri 37
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
8-Apr 3 Tue-Thu 41
Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis 14-Apr 1 Mon 42
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 28-Apr 6 Mon & Wed 38
Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis 28-Apr 1 Mon 42
Credit Risk Analysis 5-May 5 Mon-Fri 39
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
5-May 1 Mon 41
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 6-May 1 Tue 42
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 13-May 1 Tue 42
Demystifying Cash Flow 2-Jun 1 Mon 40
Overview of Basel II 3-Jun 1 Tue 42
Credit Risk Analysis for Private Bankers 5-Jun 2 Thu-Fri 39
Measuring & Managing Operational Risk:
Basel II Compliance
11-Jun 3 Wed-Fri 42
Corporate Credit Risk Judgment 16-Jun 4 Mon-Thu 38
Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis 16-Jun 1 Mon 42
Credit Portfolio Risk Management 25-Jun 3 Wed-Fri 39
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
8-Jul 1 Tue 41
Core Skills Analyst Program - Credit Risk
Analysis
11-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 37
Credit Risk Analysis 18-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 39
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 20-Aug 1 Wed 42
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
25-Aug 3 Mon-Wed 41
Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives 8-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 40
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
8-Sep 1 Mon 41
Advanced Credit Risk Analysis 16-Sep 3 Tue-Thu 36
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 17-Sep 6 Mon & Wed 38
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 18-Sep 1 Thu 42
Analysis of Financial Institutions 22-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 36
Financial Analysis of Insurance Companies 22-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 41
Credit Risk Analysis for Private Bankers 13-Oct 2 Mon-Tue 39
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
14-Oct 3 Tue-Thu 41
Overview of Basel II 17-Oct 1 Fri 42
Measuring & Managing Operational Risk:
Basel II Compliance
20-Oct 3 Mon-Wed 42
Credit Risk Analysis 27-Oct 5 Mon-Fri 39
Basel II Credit Risk 29-Oct 3 Wed-Fri 36
Credit Structuring 3-Nov 1 Mon 40
Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis 3-Nov 1 Mon 42
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
5-Nov 1 Wed 41
Corporate Failure - Early Warnings Signs 6-Nov 2 Thu-Fri 37
Advanced Credit Risk Analysis 3-Dec 3 Wed-Fri 36
Credit Portfolio Risk Management 3-Dec 3 Wed-Fri 39
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 8-Dec 1 Mon 42
Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis 8-Dec 1 Mon 42
Derivatives
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 15-Jan 1 Tue 50
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 16-Jan 2 Wed-Thu 44
Fundamentals of Derivatives (Evening) 23-Jan 10 Wed 50
Exotic CDOs 25-Jan 1 Fri 50
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 28-Jan 6 Mon & Wed 44
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 12-Feb 1 Tue 50
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 20-Feb 2 Wed-Thu 44
Derivative Product Transaction Processing 27-Feb 1 Wed 49
Advanced Options Trading Strategies 3-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 43
Derivatives and Financial Statements 6-Mar 1 Thu 48
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging 10-Mar 3 Mon-Wed 43
Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives 10-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 44
Derivatives Suite 10-Mar 5 47
Forwards & Futures 10-Mar 1 Mon 47
Options Markets I 11-Mar 1 Tue 47
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
12-Mar 3 Wed-Fri 45
Options Markets II 12-Mar 1 Wed 48
Swaps I 13-Mar 1 Thu 48
Swaps II 14-Mar 1 Fri 48
Derivatives in Emerging Markets 17-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 46
Equity Derivatives 18-Mar 2 Tue-Wed 49
Equity Derivatives 25-Mar 2 Tue-Wed 49
Credit Default Swaps: From Vanilla to Exotic
(Evening)
26-Mar 6 Wed 44
Options Markets (Evening) 27-Mar 10 Thu 50
Exotic CDOs 2-Apr 1 Wed 50
Fundamentals of Derivatives (Evening) 2-Apr 10 Wed 50
Credit Default Swaps: From Vanilla to Exotic
(Evening)
3-Apr 6 Thu 44
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
8-Apr 3 Tue-Thu 45
Derivative Products I 21-Apr 1 Mon 46
Derivative Products I & II Suite - Intensive 21-Apr 2 Mon-Tue 46
Derivative Products II 22-Apr 1 Tue 47
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 28-Apr 6 Mon & Wed 44
Demystifying Derivatives 6-May 1 Tue 45
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 6-May 1 Tue 50
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 7-May 2 Wed-Thu 44
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 13-May 1 Tue 50
Advanced Options Trading Strategies 2-Jun 2 Mon-Tue 43
Exotic CDOs 4-Jun 1 Wed 50
Derivatives Suite 9-Jun 5 47
Forwards & Futures 9-Jun 1 Mon 47
Derivative Mathematics 10-Jun 2 Tue-Wed 45
Options Markets I 10-Jun 1 Tue 47
Equity Derivatives (Evening) 11-Jun 6 Wed 49
Options Markets II 11-Jun 1 Wed 48
Swaps I 12-Jun 1 Thu 48
Swaps II 13-Jun 1 Fri 48
New York Institute of Finance 2008 Course Calendar
112
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging 23-Jun 3 Mon-Wed 43
Derivative Product Transaction Processing 23-Jun 1 Mon 49
Derivatives in Energy Markets 23-Jun 2 Mon-Tue 49
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 24-Jul 2 Thu-Fri 44
Derivative Products I 13-Aug 1 Wed 46
Derivative Products I & II Suite - Intensive 13-Aug 2 Wed-Thu 46
Derivative Products II 14-Aug 1 Thu 47
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 20-Aug 1 Wed 50
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 21-Aug 2 Thu-Fri 44
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
25-Aug 3 Mon-Wed 45
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 26-Aug 2 Tue-Wed 44
Derivative Mathematics (Evening) 26-Aug 8 Tue 45
Fundamentals of Derivatives (Evening) 2-Sep 10 Tue 50
Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives 8-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 44
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging 15-Sep 3 Mon-Wed 43
Credit Default Swaps: From Vanilla to Exotic
(Evening)
15-Sep 6 Mon 44
Derivatives and Financial Statements 16-Sep 1 Tue 48
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 17-Sep 6 Mon & Wed 44
Equity Derivatives 17-Sep 2 Wed-Thu 49
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 18-Sep 1 Thu 50
Advanced Options Trading Strategies 22-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 43
Options Markets (Evening) 2-Oct 10 Thu 50
Derivatives in Emerging Markets 6-Oct 2 Mon-Tue 46
Derivatives Suite 13-Oct 5 47
Forwards & Futures 13-Oct 1 Mon 47
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
14-Oct 3 Tue-Thu 45
Options Markets I 14-Oct 1 Tue 47
Options Markets II 15-Oct 1 Wed 48
Exotic CDOs 16-Oct 1 Thu 50
Swaps I 16-Oct 1 Thu 48
Swaps II 17-Oct 1 Fri 48
Equity Derivatives 28-Oct 2 Tue-Wed 49
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 3-Nov 2 Mon-Tue 44
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging 10-Nov 3 Mon-Wed 43
Advanced Options Trading Strategies 10-Nov 2 Mon-Tue 43
Demystifying Derivatives 12-Nov 1 Wed 45
Derivative Product Transaction Processing 17-Nov 1 Mon 49
Derivatives in Energy Markets 1-Dec 2 Mon-Tue 49
Derivative Mathematics 2-Dec 2 Tue-Wed 45
Introduction to Credit Derivatives 8-Dec 1 Mon 50
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate 9-Dec 2 Tue-Wed 44
Derivative Products I 10-Dec 1 wed 46
Derivative Products I & II Suite - Intensive 10-Dec 2 Wed-Thu 46
Derivative Products II 11-Dec 1 Thu 47
Financial Modeling
Complex LBO Modeling & Enhancements 7-Jan 3 Mon-Wed 51
Core Skills Analyst Program - Financial
Modeling
7-Jan 5 Mon-Fri 51
Financial Modeling for Corporate Finance
(Evening)
28-Jan 6 Mon 52
Super-Advanced Merger Modeling 4-Feb 4 Mon-Tue 53
Insurance Company Financial Modeling 17-Mar 3 Mon-Wed 52
Core Skills Analyst Program - Financial
Modeling
21-Apr 5 Mon-Fri 51
Using Excel to Solve Financial Problems 28-Apr 1 Mon 53
Complex LBO Modeling & Enhancements 2-Jun 3 Mon-Wed 51
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Financial Modeling for Corporate Finance
(Evening)
2-Jun 6 Mon 52
Core Skills Analyst Program - Financial
Modeling
25-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 51
Using Excel to Solve Financial Problems 8-Sep 1 Mon 53
Super-Advanced Merger Modeling 22-Sep 4 Mon-Tue 53
Insurance Company Financial Modeling 20-Oct 3 Mon-Wed 52
Fixed Income
Fixed Income Markets I (Evening) 8-Jan 4 Tue 56
Yield Curve Analysis 18-Jan 1 Fri 55
Fixed Income Markets I 14-Jan 1 Mon 54
Fixed Income Suite 14-Jan 5 Mon-Fri 54
Bond Mathematics 15-Jan 1 Tue 55
Fixed Income Markets II 16-Jan 2 Wed-Thu 55
Fixed Income Markets II (Evening) 22-Jan 8 Tue 56
Mortgage Backed Securities 24-Jan 2 Thu-Fri 58
Mortgage Backed Securities (Evening) 7-Feb 6 Thu 58
Fixed Income Markets I 25-Feb 1 Mon 54
Fixed Income Suite 25-Feb 5 Mon-Fri 54
Bond Mathematics 26-Feb 1 Tue 55
Fixed Income Markets II 27-Feb 2 Wed-Thu 55
Yield Curve Analysis 29-Feb 1 Fri 55
Mortgage Backed Securities 4-Mar 2 Tue-Wed 58
Fixed Income Mathematics 27-Mar 2 Thu-Fri 57
Market Trends: Cause & Effect on Portfolios 28-Mar 1 Fri 58
High Yield Debt: Valuation & Risk Assessment
(Evening)
1-Apr 4 Tue 57
Market Trends: Cause & Effect on Portfolios 16-Apr 1 Wed 58
Convertible Bonds 29-Apr 2 Tue-Wed 56
Fixed Income Markets I 5-May 1 Mon 56
Fixed Income Suite 5-May 5 Mon-Fri 54
Bond Mathematics 6-May 1 Tue 55
Fixed Income Markets II 7-May 2 Wed-Thu 55
Yield Curve Analysis 9-May 1 Fri 55
Fixed Income Markets I 12-May 1 Mon 54
Fixed Income Suite 12-May 5 Mon-Fri 54
Bond Mathematics 13-May 1 Tue 55
Fixed Income Markets I (Evening) 13-May 4 Tue 56
Fixed Income Markets II 14-May 2 Wed-Thu 56
Yield Curve Analysis 16-May 1 Fri 55
Fixed Income Markets I (Evening) 2-Jun 4 Mon 56
Mortgage Backed Securities 3-Jun 2 Tue-Wed 58
Fixed Income Mathematics (Evening) 17-Jun 8 Tue 57
Fixed Income Markets I 7-Jul 1 Mon 54
Fixed Income Suite 7-Jul 5 Mon-Fri 54
Bond Mathematics 8-Jul 1 Tue 55
Fixed Income Markets II 9-Jul 2 Wed-Thu 55
Yield Curve Analysis 11-Jul 1 Fri 55
Fixed Income Mathematics 15-Jul 2 Tue-Wed 57
Mortgage Backed Securities 24-Jul 2 Thu-Fri 58
Fixed Income Markets I 28-Jul 1 Mon 54
Fixed Income Suite 28-Jul 5 Mon-Fri 54
Bond Mathematics 29-Jul 1 Tue 55
Convertible Bonds 29-Jul 2 Tue-Wed 56
Fixed Income Markets II 30-Jul 2 Wed-Thu 55
Yield Curve Analysis 1-Aug 1 Fri 55
Fixed Income Markets I 15-Sep 1 Mon 54
Fixed Income Suite 15-Sep 5 Mon-Fri 54
New York Institute of Finance 2008 Course Calendar
113
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Bond Mathematics 16-Sep 1 Tue 55
Fixed Income Markets I (Evening) 16-Sep 4 Tue 56
Fixed Income Markets II (Evening) 16-Sep 8 Tue 56
Fixed Income Markets II 17-Sep 2 Wed-Thu 55
Market Trends: Cause & Effect on Portfolios 19-Sep 1 Fri 58
Yield Curve Analysis 19-Sep 1 Fri 55
Fixed Income Markets II (Evening) 6-Oct 8 Mon 56
Mortgage Backed Securities 7-Oct 2 Tue-Wed 58
Fixed Income Mathematics 14-Oct 2 Tue-Wed 57
Mortgage Backed Securities (Evening) 15-Oct 6 Wed 58
Market Trends: Cause & Effect on Portfolios 22-Oct 1 Wed 58
Fixed Income Mathematics (Evening) 27-Oct 8 Mon 57
Fixed Income Markets I 3-Nov 1 Mon 54
Fixed Income Suite 3-Nov 5 Mon-Fri 54
Bond Mathematics 4-Nov 1 Tue 55
Fixed Income Markets II 5-Nov 2 Wed-Thu 55
Mortgage Backed Securities 5-Nov 2 Wed-Thu 58
Yield Curve Analysis 7-Nov 1 Fri 55
Fixed Income Markets I 17-Nov 1 Mon 54
Fixed Income Suite 17-Nov 5 Mon-Fri 54
Bond Mathematics 18-Nov 1 Tue 55
High Yield Debt: Valuation & Risk Assessment
(Evening)
18-Nov 4 Tue 57
Fixed Income Markets II 19-Nov 2 Wed-Thu 55
Yield Curve Analysis 21-Nov 1 Fri 55
Fixed Income Mathematics 9-Dec 2 Tue-Wed 55
Fixed Income Markets I 15-Dec 1 Mon 54
Convertible Bonds 16-Dec 2 Tue-Wed 56
Fixed Income Markets II 16-Dec 2 Tue-Wed 55
Investment & Portfolio Management
Hedge Funds 15-Jan 1 Tue 63
Securities Analysis (Evening) 22-Jan 10 Tue & Thu 66
Fixed Income Portfolio Management 20-Feb 3 Wed-Fri 59
Portfolio Management Suite 20-Feb 8 Various 59
Equity Portfolio Management 25-Feb 3 Mon-Wed 59
Portfolio Management - Theory & Practice 28-Feb 2 Thu-Fri 60
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
4-Mar 1 Tue 63
Fund Selection 5-Mar 2 Wed-Thu 60
Hedge Funds 5-Mar 1 Wed 63
Wealth Management Overview 5-Mar 2 Wed-Thu 66
Stock Investing for Professionals 24-Mar 5 Mon-Fri 66
Securities Analysis 2-Apr 2 Wed-Thu 66
Equity Portfolio Management 7-Apr 3 Mon-Wed 59
Introduction to Private Equity Investments 10-Apr 1 Thu 64
Fundamentals of Investment Management 29-Apr 1 Tue 61
Exchange Traded Funds 30-Apr 1 Wed 60
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
5-May 1 Mon 63
Get Smart About Investing 7-May 2 Wed-Thu 61
Investing in Emerging Markets 8-May 2 Thu-Fri 65
Hedge Funds 13-May 1 Tue 63
Introduction to Emerging Markets 16-May 1 Fri 64
Fundamentals of Investment Management 19-May 1 Mon 61
Global Trader II 2-Jun 2 Mon-Tue 61
Global Trader III 4-Jun 3 Wed-Fri 62
Introduction to Alternative Investments 4-Jun 2 Wed-Thu 63
Hedge Funds 5-Jun 1 Thu 63
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Fund Selection 12-Jun 2 Thu-Fri 60
Fixed Income Portfolio Management 18-Jun 3 Wed-Fri 59
Portfolio Management Suite 18-Jun 8 Various 59
Equity Portfolio Management 23-Jun 3 Mon-Wed 59
Portfolio Management - Theory & Practice 26-Jun 2 Thu-Fri 60
Mutual Funds 30-Jun 2 Mon-Tue 65
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
8-Jul 1 Tue 63
Get Smart About Investing 14-Jul 2 Mon-Tue 61
Securities Analysis 21-Jul 2 Mon-Tue 66
Hedge Funds 12-Aug 1 Tue 63
Fund Selection 13-Aug 2 Wed-Thu 60
Introduction to Alternative Investments 13-Aug 2 Wed-Thu 63
Exchange Traded Funds 21-Aug 1 Thu 60
Introduction to Private Equity Investments 25-Aug 1 Mon 64
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
8-Sep 1 Mon 63
Securities Analysis (Evening) 9-Sep 10 Tue 66
Global Trader IV- Simulation 15-Sep 4 Mon-Thu 62
Securities Analysis 15-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 66
Get Smart About Investing 17-Sep 2 Wed-Thu 61
Global Trader I 19-Sep 1 Fri 61
Stock Investing for Professionals 22-Sep 5 Mon-Fri 66
Fundamentals of Investment Management 29-Sep 1 Mon 61
Hedge Funds 7-Oct 1 Tue 63
Introduction to Emerging Markets 13-Oct 1 Mon 64
Fundamentals of Investment Management 16-Oct 1 Thu 61
Mutual Funds 3-Nov 2 Mon-Tue 65
Wealth Management Overview 3-Nov 2 Mon-Tue 66
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
5-Nov 1 Wed 63
Securities Analysis 5-Nov 2 Wed-Thu 66
Fixed Income Portfolio Management 12-Nov 3 Wed-Fri 59
Portfolio Management Suite 12-Nov 8 Various 59
Investing in Emerging Markets 13-Nov 2 Thu-Fri 65
Exchange Traded Funds 14-Nov 1 Fri 60
Equity Portfolio Management 17-Nov 3 Mon-Wed 59
Portfolio Management - Theory & Practice 20-Nov 2 Thu-Fri 60
Fund Selection 24-Nov 2 Mon-Tue 60
Fundamentals of Investment Management 1-Dec 1 Mon 61
Introduction to Alternative Investments 9-Dec 2 Tue-Wed 63
Equity Portfolio Management 10-Dec 3 Wed-Fri 59
Hedge Funds 10-Dec 1 Wed 63
Hedge Funds 16-Dec 1 Tue 63
Mergers & Acquisitions
Free Cash Flow: A Powerful Decision-Making
Metric
12-Feb 1 Tue 68
Mergers & Acquisitions Suite 31-Mar 5 Mon-Fri 67
Mergers and Acquisitions: Concepts and
Theories
31-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 67
Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions 2-Apr 1 Wed 68
Free Cash Flow: A Powerful Decision-Making
Metric
3-Apr 1 Thu 68
Mergers and Acquisitions - Structuring the
Deal
4-Apr 1 Fri 68
Free Cash Flow: A Powerful Decision-Making
Metric
12-Aug 1 Tue 68
Mergers and Acquisitions: Concepts and
Theories
13-Oct 2 Mon-Tue 67
New York Institute of Finance 2008 Course Calendar
114
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Mergers and Acquisitions - Structuring the
Deal
15-Oct 1 Wed 68
Mergers & Acquisitions Suite 1-Dec 5 Mon-Fri 67
Mergers and Acquisitions: Concepts and
Theories
1-Dec 2 Mon-Tue 67
Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions 3-Dec 1 Wed 68
Free Cash Flow: A Powerful Decision-Making
Metric
4-Dec 1 Thu 68
Mergers and Acquisitions - Structuring the
Deal
5-Dec 1 Fri 68
Free Cash Flow: A Powerful Decision-Making
Metric
9-Dec 1 Tue 68
Operations & Compliance
Compliance for the Securities Industry
(Evening)
10-Jan 10 Thu 70
Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3 22-Jan 1 Tue 71
Brokerage Operations - Intensive 30-Jan 2 Wed-Thu 70
Overview of Global Securities Services 5-Feb 1 Tue 73
Compliance for the Securities Industry 7-Feb 2 Thu-Fri 70
Introduction to Net Capital Rule 15c3-1 20-Feb 1 Wed 73
Brokerage Operations - Intensive 25-Feb 2 Mon-Tue 70
Derivative Product Transaction Processing 27-Feb 1 Wed 71
Basel II Credit Risk 3-Mar 3 Mon-Wed 69
Brokerage Operations (Evening) 3-Mar 10 Mon 70
Corporate Treasury Management 10-Mar 4 Mon-Thu 71
Anti-Money Laundering 17-Mar 1 Mon 69
Global Securities Services Suite 17-Mar 3 Mon-Wed 72
Global Securities: Trading & Settlements 17-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 72
Global Securities: Custody 19-Mar 1 Wed 73
Brokerage Operations for Auditors 14-Apr 1 Mon 70
Debt Instrument Transaction Processing 16-Apr 2 Wed-Thu 71
Overview of Global Securities Services 1-May 1 Thu 73
Brokerage Operations - Intensive 12-May 2 Mon-Tue 70
Brokerage Operations (Evening) 2-Jun 10 Mon 70
Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3 18-Jun 1 Wed 71
Derivative Product Transaction Processing 23-Jun 1 Mon 71
Brokerage Operations - Intensive 23-Jul 2 Wed-Thu 70
Compliance for the Securities Industry 24-Jul 2 Thu-Fri 70
Anti-Money Laundering 25-Jul 1 Fri 69
Compliance for the Securities Industry
(Evening)
4-Sep 10 Thu 70
Brokerage Operations (Evening) 8-Sep 10 Mon 70
Introduction to Net Capital Rule 15c3-1 8-Sep 1 Mon 73
Brokerage Operations for Auditors 6-Oct 1 Mon 70
Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3 7-Oct 1 Tue 71
Overview of Global Securities Services 15-Oct 1 Wed 73
Global Securities Services Suite 20-Oct 3 Mon-Wed 72
Global Securities: Trading & Settlements 20-Oct 2 Mon-Tue 72
Global Securities: Custody 22-Oct 1 Wed 73
Anti-Money Laundering 23-Oct 1 Thu 69
Brokerage Operations - Intensive 27-Oct 2 Mon-Tue 70
Basel II Credit Risk 29-Oct 3 Wed-Fri 69
Derivative Product Transaction Processing 17-Nov 1 Mon 71
Compliance for the Securities Industry 20-Nov 2 Thu-Fri 70
Corporate Treasury Management 8-Dec 4 Mon-Thu 71
Debt Instrument Transaction Processing 8-Dec 2 Mon-Tue 71
Fundamentals of Corporate Governance TBD 1 TBD 72
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Professional Skills
Business Writing Skills 28-Jan 1 Mon 74
Negotiation Skills 25-Feb 1 Mon 74
Presentation Excellence: Building Dynamic
Business Speaking Skills
15-Apr 1 Tue 75
Business Writing Skills 21-Apr 1 Mon 74
Negotiation Skills 9-Jun 1 Mon 74
Presentation Excellence: Building Dynamic
Business Speaking Skills
15-Sep 1 Mon 75
Business Writing Skills 7-Oct 1 Tue 74
Negotiation Skills 8-Oct 1 Wed 74
Project Finance
Essentials of Project and Infrastructure
Finance
14-May 3 Wed-Fri 76
Essentials of Project and Infrastructure
Finance
14-Jul 3 Mon-Wed 76
Essentials of Project and Infrastructure
Finance
5-Nov 3 Wed-Fri 76
Risk Management
Asset Liability Management 15-Jan 2 Tue-Wed 78
Fundamentals of Credit Risk Identification &
Management
23-Jan 2 Wed-Thu 78
Introduction to Financial Risk Management 28-Jan 1 Mon 77
Risk Management Suite 28-Jan 5 Mon-Fri 77
Risk Management for the Debt & Equity
Markets
29-Jan 2 Tue-Wed 77
Risk Management of Derivatives 31-Jan 2 Thu-Fri 77
Introduction to Operational Risk 4-Feb 1 Mon 79
Introduction to Financial Risk Management 11-Feb 1 Mon 77
Risk Management Suite 11-Feb 5 Mon-Fri 77
Risk Management for the Debt & Equity
Markets
12-Feb 2 Tue-Wed 77
Risk Management of Derivatives 14-Feb 2 Thu-Fri 77
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
4-Mar 1 Tue 79
Managing Catastrophic Risks 6-Mar 2 Thu-Fri 79
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
12-Mar 3 Wed-Fri 78
Market Risk for OTC Products 12-Mar 3 Wed-Fri 80
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
8-Apr 3 Tue-Thu 78
Fundamentals of Credit Risk Identification &
Management
17-Apr 2 Thu-Fri 78
Performance Measurement 24-Apr 2 Thu-Fri 80
Value at Risk 29-Apr 2 Tue-Wed
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
5-May 1 Mon 79
Asset Liability Management 6-May 2 Tue-Wed 78
Risk Management for Insurance Companies 9-Jun 2 Mon-Tue 81
Introduction to Operational Risk 11-Jun 1 Wed 79
Measuring & Managing Operational Risk:
Basel II Compliance
11-Jun 3 Wed-Fri 80
Introduction to Financial Risk Management 16-Jun 1 Mon 77
Risk Management Suite 16-Jun 5 Mon-Fri 77
Risk Management for the Debt & Equity
Markets
17-Jun 2 Tue-Wed 77
Risk Management of Derivatives 19-Jun 2 Thu-Fri 77
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
8-Jul 1 Tue 79
Value at Risk 28-Jul 2 Mon-Tue 81
Asset Liability Management 30-Jul 2 Wed-Thu 78
New York Institute of Finance 2008 Course Calendar
115
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Introduction to Financial Risk Management 4-Aug 1 Mon 77
Risk Management Suite 4-Aug 5 Mon-Fri 77
Risk Management for the Debt & Equity
Markets
5-Aug 2 Tue-Wed 77
Risk Management of Derivatives 7-Aug 2 Thu-Fri 77
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
25-Aug 3 Mon-Wed 78
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
8-Sep 1 Mon 79
Asset Liability Management 9-Sep 2 Tue-Wed 78
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
14-Oct 3 Tue-Thu 78
Fundamentals of Credit Risk Identification &
Management
16-Oct 2 Thu-Fri 78
Measuring & Managing Operational Risk:
Basel II Compliance
20-Oct 3 Mon-Wed 80
Introduction to Financial Risk Management 27-Oct 1 Mon 77
Risk Management for Insurance Companies 27-Oct 2 Mon-Tue 81
Risk Management Suite 27-Oct 5 Mon-Fri 77
Risk Management for the Debt & Equity
Markets
28-Oct 2 Tue-Wed 77
Risk Management of Derivatives 30-Oct 2 Thu-Fri 77
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment and
Management
5-Nov 1 Wed 79
Value at Risk 10-Nov 2 Mon-Tue 81
Asset Liability Management 12-Nov 2 Wed-Thu 78
Managing Catastrophic Risks 12-Nov 2 Wed-Thu 79
Introduction to Operational Risk 17-Nov 1 Mon 79
Performance Measurement 18-Nov 2 Tue-Wed 80
Fundamentals of Credit Risk Identification &
Management
8-Dec 2 Mon-Tue 78
Introduction to Financial Risk Management 15-Dec 1 Mon 77
Risk Management Suite 15-Dec 5 Mon-Fri 77
Risk Management for the Debt & Equity
Markets
16-Dec 2 Tue-Wed 77
Risk Management of Derivatives 18-Dec 2 Thu-Fri 77
Structured Products
Overview of Structured Products 6-Feb 2 Wed-Thu 83
Overview of Structured Products 14-Apr 2 Mon-Tue 83
Structured Products Suite 14-Apr 5 Mon-Fri 82
Structured Credit Modeling 16-Apr 3 Wed-Fri 83
Financial Management of Structured Products 1-May 2 Thu-Fri 82
Overview of Structured Products 15-Jul 2 Tue-Wed 83
Overview of Structured Products 8-Sep 2 Mon-Tue 83
Structured Products Suite 8-Sep 5 Mon-Fri 82
Structured Credit Modeling 10-Sep 3 Wed-Fri 83
Financial Management of Structured Products 13-Oct 2 Mon-Tue 82
Overview of Structured Products 2-Dec 2 Tue-Wed 83
Course
Start
Date Sessions Days Pg#
Technical Analysis
Essentials of Fusion Analysis (Evening) 24-Jan 4 Mon & Thu 85
Technical Analysis 24-Jan 2 Thu-Fri 86
Advanced Technical Analysis Workshop 25-Feb 4 Mon & Tue 84
Fusion Analysis 17-Mar 2 Mon-Tue 85
Technical Analysis 101 w/ Ralph Acampora
(Evening)
17-Mar 10 Mon 86
Essentials of Fusion Analysis (Evening) 3-Jun 4 Tue 85
CMT Examination Preparation/Technical
Analysis
9-Jul 2 Wed-Thu 84
Technical Analysis 21-Jul 2 Mon-Tue 86
Essentials of Fusion Analysis (Evening) 8-Sep 4 Mon & Thu 85
Technical Analysis 101 w/ Ralph Acampora
(Evening)
8-Sep 10 Mon 86
Technical Analysis 11-Sep 2 Thu-Fri 86
Advanced Technical Analysis Workshop 13-Oct 4 Mon & Thu 84
Technical Analysis 6-Nov 2 Thu-Fri 86
Trading
Options Volatility Trading (Evening) 21-Feb 8 Thu 91
Equities Trading (Evening) 5-Mar 8 Wed 88
Trading for Non-Traders 10-Mar 3 Mon-Wed 91
Bond Trading 12-Mar 1 Wed 88
Options Volatility Trading - Intensive 24-Mar 3 Mon-Wed 91
Trading for Non-Traders 26-Mar 3 Wed-Fri 91
Foreign Exchange Marketplace 27-Mar 2 Thu-Fri 89
Exchange Traded Funds 30-Apr 1 Wed 88
Foreign Exchange Marketplace (Evening) 22-May 6 Thu 89
Global Trader II 2-Jun 2 Mon-Tue 89
Global Trader III 4-Jun 3 Wed-Fri 89
Trading for Non-Traders 9-Jun 3 Mon-Wed 91
Introduction to Stealth Trading Using Fusion,
Algorithms and Derivatives for Professionals
16-Jun 1 Mon 90
Equities Trading - Intensive 25-Jun 2 Wed-Thu 88
Options Volatility Trading - Intensive 21-Jul 3 Mon-Wed 91
Exchange Traded Funds 21-Aug 1 Thu 88
Trading for Non-Traders 9-Sep 3 Tue-Thu 91
Bond Trading 15-Sep 1 Mon 88
Global Trader IV- Simulation 15-Sep 4 Mon-Thu 90
Global Trader I 19-Sep 1 Fri 89
Foreign Exchange Marketplace (Evening) 25-Sep 6 Thu 89
Options Volatility Trading (Evening) 13-Oct 8 Mon 91
Trading for Non-Traders 13-Oct 3 Mon-Wed 91
Bond Trading 15-Oct 1 Wed 88
Equities Trading (Evening) 22-Oct 8 Wed 88
Exchange Traded Funds 14-Nov 1 Fri 88
Options Volatility Trading - Intensive 18-Nov 3 Tue-Thu 91
Foreign Exchange Marketplace 11-Dec 2 Thu-Fri 89
Equities Trading - Intensive 17-Dec 2 Wed-Thu 88
Insider Trading TBD 1 TBD 90

116 Customer Care: 212-641-6616 customercare@nyif.com Full course outlines: www.nyif.com
Obtain the prestigious New York Institute
of Finance Professional Certificate to help
you meet your professional and personal
goals.
A Professional Certificate can help you in
many ways, including:
Qualify for a new, higher paying job •
Remain at the leading edge of your •
field
Research a new career •
Attain knowledge in a new field •
Build your contact network •
The Professional Certificate Programs are
comprehensive in scope and offer you a
wide variety of courses to choose from.
Plus, you get to decide when you take
them. Courses are offered during the day,
evening, and via eLearning. In addition,
you will receive CPE credits to ensure
you are keeping up to date with your
professional requirements.
To qualify for a New York Institute of
Finance Professional Certificate, you
must complete four core courses and
two electives over a period of three
years. You must attend at least 80% of
any instructor-led course and receive a
passing grade on any eLearning course.
For more details on the New York
Institute of Finance Professional
Certificate Programs, please contact
Customer Care at 212-641-6616 or visit
our website at www.nyif.com/certificate.
C E R T I F I C A T E O F C O M P L E T I O N
This is to certify that
Jane Lees
has completed all required coursework for
Professional Certificate in Finance
Date: July 2, 2004
Number of CPE Credits: 24
Field of Study: Investment Analysis
Instructional Method: Group-Live, Online
Courses Completed:
Equities I Online Course
Financial Statement Analysis
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry
Introduction to Business Valuation Online
Introducing the City
In accordance with the standards of the National Registry of CPE Sponsors, CPE credits have been granted based on a 50-minute hour.
National Registry of CPE Sponsors
FT Knowledge Financial Learning ID Number 103413
New York Institute of Finance
1330 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10019
www.ftknowledge.com
The following Professional Certificate
Programs are offered by New York
Institute of Finance:
• Certificate in Credit
Certificate in Finance •
Certificate in Derivatives and •
Risk Management
Certificate in Portfolio Management •
Certificate in Wealth Management •
Professional Certificate Programs
Continuing education is recognized
more than ever as a career necessity
for the financial industry professional.
New York Institute of Finance’s
instructor-led courses are eligible
to meet the continuing education
requirements of CPAs, lawyers,
holders of brokerage licenses,
financial planners and advisors,
business managers, and anyone else
looking to expand their professional
knowledge to effectively meet
clients’ needs in today’s multiservice
environment. We offer several routes
to meeting continuing education
requirements.
In accordance with NASBA requirements, each New York Institute of Finance course
has the following information:
Learning objectives and brief program content (Full agendas for each course can be •
found online at www.nyif.com.)
Course level–introductory, intermediate or advanced. •
Prerequisites–whether advance preparation is required before attending the course. •
Instructional method–Group live, group-internet based, or a self-study offering. •
Recommended CPE credit to be awarded for each course. Sponsored learning •
activities are measured by program length, with one 50-minute period equal to one
CPE credit. One-half CPE credit increments (equal to 25 minutes) are permitted after
the first credit has been earned in a given learning activity. Please note that not
all state boards have adopted this rule. Some participants may not be able to use
one-half credit increments.
Continuing Professional Education
New York Institute of Finance is registered with the National Association of State Boards of Accountancy (NASBA), as a sponsor of continuing professional
education on the National Registry of CPE Sponsors. State boards of accountancy have final authority on the acceptance of individual courses for CPE
credit. Complaints regarding registered sponsors may be addresses to the National Registry of CPE Sponsors, 150 Fourth Avenue North, Suite 700,
Nashville, TN 37219-2417. Website: www.nasba.org
Index
A
Accounting for Derivatives & Hedging . . . 13, 43
Accounting for Mergers & Acquisitions . . . 13, 68
Advanced Corporate Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Advanced Credit Risk Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Advanced Financial Accounting Topics . . . . . . 14
Advanced Hedge Funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Advanced Options Trading Strategies . . . . . . . 43
Advanced Technical Analysis/
Real Time Usage – Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 87
Advanced Technical Analysis Workshop . . . . . 84
Analysis of Financial Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Analyzing Pension Footnotes and New
Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
An IPO Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Anti-Money Laundering . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 69, 104
Anti-Money Laundering - Online . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Asset Backed Securities - Online . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Asset Liability Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Asset Liability Management for
Insurance Companies - Online . . . . . . . . . . 102
Asset Liability Management - Online . . . . . . 102
Asset Securitization - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
B
Bank Branch Management –
Advances - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Bank Branch Management –
Deposits - Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Bank Branch Management –
Foreign Exchange Operations - Online . . . . 99
Bank Branch Management –
Marketing - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Bank Branch Management – Payment and
Settlement Systems - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Bank Branch Management Suite . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Bank Branch Management –
Trade Finance - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Basel II Credit Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 69
Basel II University - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Bond Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Bond Trading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Brokerage Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Brokerage Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Brokerage Operations for Auditors . . . . . . . . . 70
Brokerage Operations - Intensive . . . . . . . . . . 70
Brokerage Operations - Online. . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Budgeting - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Business and Industry Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Business Valuation - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Business Writing Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
C
Capital Adequacy Planning –
Basel I - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Capital Markets: Macro Economics . . . . . . . . 105
CFA
®
Core Concepts: Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . 21
CFA
®
Core Concepts: Quantitative Methods . 21
CFA
®
Exam Level I 18-Session Review Class . 20
CFA
®
Exam Level II 18-Session Review . . . . . 22
CFA
®
Exam Level II Problem Solving . . . . . . . . 22
CFA
®
Exam Level I Problem Solving . . . . . . . . . 21
CFA
®
Exam Level I Review Suite . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CFA
®
Exam Level I Weeklong
Intensive Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
CMT Exam Preparation /
Technical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 84
Commodity Trading Fundamentals . . . . . . . . 105
Communicating with Confidence:
Make Your Business Writing More
Effective - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Communicating with Confidence: Make Your
Presentations More Effective - Online . . . . 101
Comparing U.S. GAAP and International
Financial Reporting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Complex LBO Modeling & Enhancement . . . . 51
Compliance for the Securities Industry . . . . . 70
Consultative Selling Skills to
Investment Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Convertible Bonds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Core Skills Analyst Program –
Accounting Bootcamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 15
Core Skills Analyst Program – Corporate
Finance & Valuation Fundamentals . . . . . 6, 32
Core Skills Analyst Program –
Credit Risk Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 37
Core Skills Analyst Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Core Skills Analyst Program –
Financial Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 51
Core Skills Analyst Program with
Accounting Bootcamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Corporate Credit Analysis - Online . . . . . . . . . . 95
Corporate Credit Risk Judgment . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Corporate Failure - Early Warning Signs . . . . . 37
Corporate Finance & Financial
Management Solutions for
Wealth Advisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 33
Corporate Finance - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Corporate Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Corporate Governance - Online . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Corporate Treasury Management:
Case Studies - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Corporate Treasury Management . . . . . . . 23, 71
Corporate Treasury Management:
Foreign Exchange Management - Online . . 98
Corporate Treasury Management:
Funding and Investments - Online . . . . . . . 100
Corporate Treasury Management:
Interest Rate Risk Management - Online . . 100
Corporate Treasury Management:
Treasury Analytics - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Counter Party Credit Risk - Online . . . . . . . . . . 95
Credit Analysis - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Credit Default Swaps: From Vanilla to Exotic . 44
Credit Derivatives: Intermediate . . . . . . . . 38, 44
Credit Derivatives - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Credit Portfolio Risk Management . . . . . . . . . . 39
Credit Ratings - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Credit Risk Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Credit Risk Analysis for Private Bankers . . . . . 39
Credit Risk Modeling - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Credit Risk of OTC Derivatives . . . . . . . . . . .40, 44
Credit Structuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Credit Structuring Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Customer Loyalty: Cost vs. Benefits –
A Quantitative Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Customer Protection Rule 15c3-3 . . . . . . . 15, 71
D
Debt Instrument Transaction Processing . . . . 71
Demystifying Cash Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Demystifying Derivatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Derivative Credit Risk Judgment
and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 45, 78
Derivative Instruments - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Derivative Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Derivative Products I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Derivative Products II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Derivative Products I & II Suite – Intensive . . 46
Derivative Product Transaction
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 71
Derivatives and Financial Statements . . . . . . 48
Derivatives in Emerging Markets . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Derivatives in Energy Markets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Derivatives Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
E
Economic Indicators: Clues to the Future . . . 23
Economics for Managers:
Understanding Macroeconomics - Online . 93
Economics Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
eFRM Coach - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Energy Markets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ePRM Coach - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Equities - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Equities Trading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Equity Derivatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Equity Markets - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Equity Portfolio Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Essentials of Banking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Essentials of Corporate Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Essentials of Fusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Essentials of Project and Infrastructure
Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Essentials of U.S. Capital Markets . . . . . . . . . . 24
Exchange Traded Funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Exchange Traded Funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Exotic CDOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
F
Finance Essentials for the Professional . . . . . 24
Finance for Non-Financial Managers - Online . 94
Financial Accounting - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Financial Analysis of Insurance
Companies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 41
Financial Forecasting Concepts and
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Financial Institution Analysis -
CAMELS Approach - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Financial Management of Structured
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Financial Mathematics - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Financial Modeling for Corporate
Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 52
Financial Planning - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Financial Privacy - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Financial Statement Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Financial Statement Analysis - Online . . . . . . . 98
Fixed Income Markets I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 56
Fixed Income Markets II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 56
Fixed Income Markets - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fixed Income Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fixed Income Portfolio Management . . . . . . . 59
Fixed Income Securities - Online . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fixed Income Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Flotation - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Foreign Exchange Marketplace . . . . . . . . . 26, 89
Foreign Exchange Markets - Online . . . . . . . . . 98
Forwards & Futures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Forwards & Futures - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Free Cash Flow: A Powerful
Decision-Making Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Free Cash Flow: The Key to Shareholder
Value Creation (Part I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Free Cash Flow: The Key to Shareholder
Value Creation (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Free Cash Flow: The Key to Shareholder
Value Creation (Parts 1 and 2 combined) . 106
117
Index
Fundamentals of Corporate Governance . . . . 72
Fundamentals of Credit Risk
Identification & Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fundamentals of Derivatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fundamentals of Investment Management . . 61
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry . . . . 27
Fundamentals of the Securities Industry -
Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fund Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
G
Get Smart About Investing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Global Banking Supervision - Online . . . . . . 102
Global Economic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Global Securities: Custody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Global Securities Services Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Global Securities: Trading & Settlements . . . . 72
Global Trader I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 89
Global Trader II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 89
Global Trader III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 89
Global Trader IV – Simulation . . . . . . . . . .62, 90
Governance, Risk, and Compliance - Online . 102
Grow/Protect Wealth:
Alternative Investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Grow/Protect Wealth: Derivatives . . . . . . . . . . 11
Grow Wealth: Asset Management . . . . . . . . . . 10
Grow Wealth: Liquidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
H
Hedge Fund Credit Risk Judgment
and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 63, 79
Hedge Funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 63
Hedge Funds - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
High Yield Debt: Valuation &
Risk Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
I
Inflation and Deflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Initial Public Offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 34
Insider Trading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Insurance Company Financial Modeling . . . . . 52
Inter-Company Investments and
Consolidated Financial Statements . . . . . . . 16
Intermediate Accounting Topics:
Leases, Pensions, and Deferred Taxes . . . . . 16
International Capital Markets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
International Corporate Finance . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Introducing the City - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Introduction to Alternative Investments . 18, 63
Introduction to Credit Derivatives . . . . . . . 42, 50
Introduction to Credit Risk Analysis . . . . . . . . . 42
Introduction to Critical Thinking - Online . . . 101
Introduction to Emerging Markets . . . . . . . . . . 64
Introduction to Financial Accounting . . . . . . . 16
Introduction to Financial Engineering . . . . . . . 35
Introduction to Financial Risk Management . 77
Introduction to LBOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Introduction to Municipal Bonds . . . . . . . . . . 106
Introduction to Net Capital Rule 15c3-1 . . . . . 73
Introduction to Operational Risk . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Introduction to Private Equity
Investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 64
Introduction to Stealth Trading Using
Fusion, Algorithms, and Derivatives
for Professionals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Introduction to the Wealth Environment . . . . . 9
Intro to Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Investing in Emerging Markets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
K
Know Your Client (KYC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 35
L
Liquidity Management & Contingency
Funding Plan - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
M
Management Accounting - Online . . . . . . . . . . 92
Managerial Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Managing Catastrophic Risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Margin I: Introduction to Margin
Regulations - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Margin II: Advanced Margin for
Options - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Market Risk Advanced - Online . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Market Risk Basics - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Market Risk for OTC Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Market Risk Intermediate - Online . . . . . . . . . 103
Market Trends: Cause & Effect on Portfolios . 58
M & A Separation Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Measuring & Managing Operational Risk:
Basel II Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 80
Mergers & Acquisitions: Concepts and
Theories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Mergers & Acquisitions - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Mergers & Acquisitions: Structuring the Deal . 68
Mergers & Acquisitions Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Money & Banking - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Money Markets - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Mortgage-Backed Securities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Mutual Funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Mutual Funds - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
N
New Rules for Letters of Credit - Online . . . . 103
O
Operational Risk Management - Online . . . . 103
Options Markets I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Options Markets II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Options Markets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Options - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Options Volatility Trading - Intensive . . . . . . . . 91
Overview of Asian Capital Markets . . . . . . . . . 29
Overview of Basel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Overview of Capital Markets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Overview of Equities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Overview of Global Securities Services . . . . . 73
Overview of Structured Products . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Overview of Trade Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Overview of Trade Finance Concepts. . . . . . . . 29
Overview of Trusts - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
P
Performance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Portfolio Management I - Online . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Portfolio Management II - Online . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Portfolio Management Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Portfolio Management - Theory & Practice . . 60
Practical Applications of Sarbanes-Oxley . . . . 29
Presentation Excellence: Building Dynamic
Business Speaking Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Probability and Statistics for the Finance
Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Project Valuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Protect Wealth: International
Estate Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
R
Reading the Financial Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Risk Management for Insurance Companies . 81
Risk Management for the Debt & Equity
Markets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Risk Management of Derivatives . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Risk Management Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Risk Management Using Derivatives - Online 97
S
Sarbanes-Oxley - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Securities Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Short-Term Trading - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
So You Want to Be an Investment Banker . . 107
Statistical Concepts for the Marketplace . . . . 30
Stock Investing for Professionals . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Strategic Financial Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Structured Credit Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Structured Products Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Super-Advanced Merger Modeling . . . . . . . . . 53
Swaps I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Swaps II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Swaps - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
T
Tax Concepts for Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 31
Technical Analysis 101 with
Ralph Acampora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Technical Analysis – Basic Principles and
Theories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 87
Technical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
The Hype and Myth Surrounding
Private Equity & Hedge Funds . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The Successful Manager:
Time Management - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Trading for Non-Traders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Transparency in Financial Statements . . . . . . 17
U
Understanding Corporate Balance Sheets
and Income Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Understanding Derivative Product
Footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Understanding Financial Institutions
Balance Sheets and Income Statements. . 107
Understanding Financial Statement
Footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Understanding Financial Statements - Online . 94
Using Excel™ to Solve Financial Problems . . 53
V
Value at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Value-at-Risk - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W
Wealth Management - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Wealth Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Wealth Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Y
Yield Curve Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
118
Enrollment Application and Order Form
119
COURSE TI TLE CODE DATE COST
Example EXAM2001 4/31/08 $Example
- Discounts
Contact New York Institute of Finance to verify course status two days prior
to start date if you do not receive written registration confirmation.
Total
PERSONAL I NFORMATI ON Required for all enrollments and orders.
PLEASE TYPE OR PRI NT CLEARLY
† Mr. † Ms.
Last Name First Name Middle Initial
Firm Name
Title Department
Manager’s Name
Address († Home † Work)
Ste./Fl.
City State Zip Country
Phone ( ) Fax ( )
Email Address
† Please send me information via email (see privacy policy at the right).
How did you hear about us?
PAYMENT METHOD
❑ Company Check ❑ Mastercard ❑ VISA ❑ American Express ❑ Wire Transfer
If paying by credit card, complete and sign below.
Cardholder Signature
Name as on Card
Card
Number
Expiration
Date /
If you’d like to send your company check directly to our bank account, please mail the check to:
Bank of America, 12562 Collection Center Drive, Chicago, Illinois 60693
I certify that the above information is correct. I am aware of the prerequisites for the course(s)/course(s) for which I
am registering and have met the necessary requirements. I have read and understand the enrollment policies.
Attendee Signature Date
ENROLLMENT POLICIES
Your registration is not complete until payment is
received.
Cancellation, Transfer, and Substitution Policy:
A full refund less a cancellation fee of 10% will be
applied to all cancellations received in writing at
least 10 business days before the event. Absolutely
no refund or credit will be given for cancellations
received less than 10 business days before the
event. A charge of 10% of the course fee will be
applied to all transfers that occur within 10 business
days before the event. Please note that visa issues
are subject to the same refund policy and refunds
will not be offered due to the inability to obtain a
visa. Should a participant be unable to attend, a
substitute may attend at no extra charge provided
NYIF receives notification of the substitution before
the event.
Incidental Expenses: NYIF is NOT responsible for
covering airfare or other travel costs incurred by
registrants.
Venue details: Please refer to our website for
venue location. Full details will be sent to you upon
registration.
Disclaimer: NYIF reserves the right to alter the
contents of this course and/or the course directors
due to circumstances beyond our control.
FT Subscription: One subscription per attendee.
Subscriptions start within 6–8 weeks of start of
course. U.S. attendees only. FT.com included for all
delegates.
Privacy Policy: NYIF takes your privacy seriously.
We collect and use personal information to provide
you with our information services, conduct market
research surveys, and contact you with details of
products and services we offer.
Check the relevant boxes if you prefer not to receive
information about:
NYIF products †
Pearson products †
Products or services offered jointly with, or by †
other organizations
If you have checked the third box, we will not
disclose your personal information to companies
outside the Pearson Group, except to business
partners and suppliers that process data on our
behalf. As we are an international group, we may
transfer your data on a global basis for the purposes
indicated above.
NEW YORK INSTITUTE OF FINANCE
IS A SUBSIDIARY OF PEARSON, LLC.
1330 Avenue of the Americas • New York, NY • 10019
© New York Institute of Finance 2008. New York Institute of Finance reserves the right to alter the prices, change the instructor, or cancel the course at any time due to unforeseen circumstances.
Customer Care:
212-641-6616
212-641-2598
customercare@nyif.com
www.nyif.com
Call our Customer Care Team at 212-641-6616
Full course outlines available at www.nyif.com
customercare@nyif.com
1330 Avenue of the Americas • New York, NY • 10019
RETURN SERVICE REQUESTED

Master your semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Special offer for students: Only $4.99/month.

Master your semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Cancel anytime.